VOLVO S80 Owner's Manual

VOLVO S80

Owner's manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impair- will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile ment that could hinder your ability to drive. designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, instructions in this manual. please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on get- in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a ting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada. Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 8 Occupant safety...... 16 Remote key and key blade...... 52 Environment...... 12 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Valet locking ...... 59 Important warnings...... 13 Seat belts ...... 18 Keyless drive...... 60 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... 21 Locks...... 63 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 26 Alarm...... 67 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... 30 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 32 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... 33 Crash mode...... 35 Child safety...... 36 Child restraint systems...... 39 Infant seats...... 41 Convertible seats...... 43 00 Booster01 cushions...... 45 02 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 46 Top tether anchors...... 47 Child safety locks...... 48

4 Contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Infotainment Instruments and controls...... 72 Volvo Sensus...... 124 Introduction...... 200 Ignition modes...... 80 Menus and messages...... 125 Getting started ...... 202 Seats...... 82 The MY CAR menus...... 127 General infotainment functions ...... 207 Steering wheel...... 88 Climate system...... 133 Radio...... 210 Lighting...... 90 Trip computer...... 142 Media player...... 219 Wipers and washers...... 96 Stability system...... 144 AUX/USB sockets...... 223 Power windows...... 99 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 146 Bluetooth media ...... 226 Mirrors...... 101 Cruise control...... 147 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 229 Compass*...... 103 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*...... 149 Cell phone voice control...... 237 Power moonroof*...... 104 Distance Alert* ...... 159 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ...... 241 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... 106 City Safety™ ...... 162 Remote control*...... 250 Starting the engine...... 109 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Infotainment system menus ...... 252 Pedestrian Detection*...... 167 Transmission...... 113 Driver Alert System* ...... 175 Brakes...... 116 03 Park04 assist*...... 181 05 Parking brake...... 119 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ...... 185 Blind Spot Information System*...... 189 Passenger compartment convenience... 193

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

06 During your trip 07 Wheels and tires 08 Maintenance and Driving recommendations...... 258 General information ...... 278 specifications Refueling...... 262 Tire inflation...... 281 Volvo maintenance...... 306 Loading...... 267 Inflation pressure ...... 283 Maintaining your car...... 307 Towing a trailer...... 270 Tire designations ...... 284 Hood and engine compartment...... 309 Emergency towing...... 273 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 286 Engine oil...... 310 Vehicle loading ...... 287 Fluids...... 312 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 289 Replacing bulbs...... 314 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . 290 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 321 Temporary Spare ...... 291 Battery...... 323 Tire Sealing System...... 292 Fuses...... 326 Changing a wheel ...... 298 Vehicle care...... 334 06 Tire Pressure07 Monitoring System (TPMS) 301 08

6 Contents

09 Specifications 10 Index Label information...... 342 Index...... 356 Specifications...... 344 Overview of information and warning symbols...... 351 Volvo09 programs...... 354 10

7 Introduction

Important information

Contacting Volvo About this manual Decals In the USA: There are various types of decals in the vehicle • Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor- time, please familiarize yourself with the Volvo Cars of North America, LLC mation in a clear and concise way. The impor- information found in the chapters "Your Customer Care Center tance of these decals is explained as follows, Driving Environment" and "During Your in descending order of importance. 1 Volvo Drive, Trip." P.O. Box 914 • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury manual is extremely useful and should be Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 read after operating the vehicle for the first 1-800-458-1552 time. www.volvocars.us • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it In Canada: should be kept in the vehicle for ready access. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp Footnotes National Customer Service Certain pages of this manual contain informa- 175 Gordon Baker Road tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). 1-800-663-8255 G031590 www.volvocars.ca Display texts There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back- various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death. rounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Change doors unlock setting).

8 Introduction

Important information

Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are car- G031592 G031593 ried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a to indicate the direction of a movement. black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. If there are no illustrations associated with a this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure could result. NOTE are indicated by ordinary numbers. Position lists The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to Red circles containing a number are used be reproductions of the decals actually used in general overview illustrations in which in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- certain components are pointed out. The cation of how they look and their approxi- corresponding number is also used in the mate location in the vehicle. The applicable position list's description of the various information for your particular vehicle can components. be found on the respective decals in the vehicle.

9 Introduction

Important information

Bullet lists NOTE WARNING Bullets are used to differentiate a number of components/functions/points of information • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 that can be listed in random order. cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or For example: available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- • Coolant • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain • Engine oil changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or without incurring obligation. Continued emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- This symbol can be found at the lower right • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm. to indicate that the current topic is continued try's applicable safety and emission on the following page. control requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING Options and accessories with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as Optional or accessory equipment described in to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, this manual is indicated by an asterisk. render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Optional or accessory equipment may not be other countries. Special handling may apply for service or available in all countries or markets. Please vehicle end of life disposal. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ ferently, depending on special legal require- WARNING perchlorate. ments. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- unseen damage may affect its drivability mation. and safety.

10 Introduction

Important information

Shiftlock Points to keep in mind Vehicle event data (Black box) When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector • Do not export your Volvo to another coun- Your vehicle's driving and safety systems is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the try before investigating that country's employ computers that monitor, and share selector from this position, the ignition must be applicable safety and exhaust emission with each other, information about your vehi- in mode II (see page 80) or the engine must requirements. In some cases it may be dif- cle's operation. One or more of these comput- be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the ficult or impossible to comply with these ers may store what they monitor, either during button on the front side of the gear selector and requirements. Modifications to the emis- normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near- sion control system(s) may render your move the selector from P (Park). crash event. Stored information may be read Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in and used by: Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) the U.S., Canada and other countries. The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnos- • All information, illustrations and specifica- • Volvo Car Corporation tic test when the engine has been started and tions contained in this manual are based on • service and repair facilities driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- the latest product information available at • law enforcement or government agencies matic test may be performed when the vehicle the time of publication. Please note that first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph some vehicles may be equipped differ- • others who may assert a legal right to know, or who obtain your consent to know (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several ently, depending on special legal require- such information. times and a sound may be audible from the ments. Optional equipment described in ABS control module. This is normal. this manual may not be available in all markets. Fuel filler door • Volvo reserves the right to make model Press the button on the light switch panel (see changes at any time, or to change specifi- the illustration on page 264) when the vehicle cations or design without notice and with- is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. out incurring obligation. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks.

Fuel filler cap The fuel filler door, located on the right rear quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's central locking system.

11 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment continuous environmental refinement of con- Recycling Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environ- tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at ment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recy- we care about the environment in which we all advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. cled in an environmentally sound way. Almost live. Caring for the environment means an the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that everyday involvement in reducing our environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on to contact a Volvo retailer for information about are based on a holistic view, which means we the environment. To reduce your vehicle's approved and certified recycling facilities. consider the overall environmental impact of a environmental impact, you can: product throughout its complete life cycle. In • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. this context, design, production, product use, Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- and recycling are all important considerations. omy with improperly inflated tires. In production, Volvo has partly or completely • Follow the recommended maintenance phased out several chemicals including CFCs, schedule in your Warranty and Service lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and Records Information booklet. reduced the number of chemicals used in our • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- plants 50% since 1991. sible. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into • See a trained and qualified Volvo service production a three-way catalytic converter with technician as soon as possible for inspec- a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- sensor, in 1976. The current version of this cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the highly efficient system reduces emissions of vehicle has started. harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and waste such as used motor oil, used batter- the search to eliminate the remaining emis- ies, brake pads, etc. sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile When cleaning your vehicle, please use manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for • genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

12 Introduction

Important warnings

Driver distraction cellular telephone use by a driver while the • Accessories that have not been approved A driver has a responsibility to do everything vehicle is moving. by Volvo may or may not be specifically possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- tion system, set and make changes to your Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. systems. is part of that responsibility. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- • Any of your car's performance and safety Driver distraction results from driver activities systems could be adversely affected if you that are not directly related to controlling the sets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use install accessories that Volvo has not tes- vehicle in the driving environment. Your new quicker and simpler. ted, or if you allow accessories to be instal- Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- led by someone unfamiliar with your vehi- ture-rich entertainment and communication • Never use portable computers or personal cle. systems. These include hands-free cellular tel- digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. • Damage caused by unapproved or ephones, navigation systems, and multipur- improperly installed accessories may not pose audio systems. You may also own other be covered by your new vehicle warranty. portable electronic devices for your own con- Accessory installation See your Warranty and Service Records venience. When used properly and safely, they • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Information booklet for more warranty enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, install only genuine, Volvo-approved information. Volvo assumes no responsi- any of these could cause a distraction. accessories, and that accessory installa- bility for death, injury, or expenses that For all of these systems, we want to provide the tions be performed only by a trained and may result from the installation of non-gen- following warning that reflects the strong Volvo qualified Volvo service technician. uine accessories. concern for your safety. Never use these devi- • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ces or any feature of your vehicle in a way that ensure compatibility with the performance, distracts you from the task of driving safely. safety, and emission systems in your vehi- Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified addition to this general warning, we offer the Volvo service technician knows where following guidance regarding specific newer accessories may and may not be safely features that may be found in your vehicle: installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone ice technician before installing any acces- while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit sory in or on your vehicle.

13 Occupant safety...... 16 Reporting safety defects...... 17 Seat belts ...... 18 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...... 21 Occupant Weight Sensor ...... 26 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ...... 30 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 32 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS...... 33 Crash mode...... 35 Child safety...... 36 Child restraint systems...... 39 Infant seats...... 41 Convertible seats...... 43 Booster cushions...... 45 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 46 Top tether anchors...... 47 Child safety locks...... 48

14 SAFETY 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects off the production line. Three-point seat belts on your driving abilities. (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights clean. We will not compromise our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hear- • Take into account the traffic, road, and ing your suggestions about improving automo- weather conditions, particularly with bile safety. We also want to know if you ever regard to stopping distance. have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us • Never send text messages while driving. in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a 1-800-663-8255. cell phone while driving. Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on: • How well you see. • Your ability to concentrate. • How quickly you make decisions under stress to avoid an accident. The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

16 01 Safety

Reporting safety defects 01

Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a Volvo strongly recommends that if If you believe your vehicle has a defect that defect which could cause a crash or could cause a crash or could cause injury or your vehicle is covered under a serv- death, you should immediately inform Trans- could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars should immediately inform the recall or similar action, it should be of Canada Corp. National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. Transport Canada can be contacted at: Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer 1-800-333-0510 notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 tion, and if it finds that a safety defect Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road exists in a group of vehicles, it may NHTSA can be reached at: Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet: 0A1 However, NHTSA cannot become http://www.nhtsa.gov involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Telephone: Cars of North America, LLC. To con- 1-888-DASH-2-DOT tact NHTSA, you may either call the (1-888-327-4236). Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- portation, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from:

17 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

General information in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces NOTE exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) Fastening a seat belt is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat belt Buckling taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is a sound from the seat belt retractor will be heard. The seat belt retractor is normally audible, which is normal, and the seat belt "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided will be pulled taut and locked in place. This that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. Seat belt retractor The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- See also page 37 for information about using lowing situations: Adjusting the seat belt a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a • if the belt is pulled out rapidly child seat. Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- • during braking and acceleration pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- When wearing the seat belt remember: if the vehicle is leaning excessively erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster • • The belt should not be twisted or turned. seat determined by age, weight and height. • when driving in turns • The lap section of the belt must be posi- Volvo also believes no child should sit in the • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- tioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen). front seat of a vehicle. gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled Most states and provinces make it mandatory up into its retractor and that the shoulder for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. and lap belts are taut. Seat belt pretensioners Unbuckling the seat belt All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners To remove the seat belt, press the red section that reduce slack in the belts. These preten- on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the sioners are triggered in situations where the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully front or side impact airbags deploy, and in cer- after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the tain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts belt back into the retractor slot. also include a tension reducing device which,

18 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

Seat belt maintenance WARNING Seat belt reminder Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild deter- • Never repair the belt yourself; have this gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three-point WARNING belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection avail- Never use a seat belt for more than one able to you in the event of a collision. occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion The seat back should not be tilted too of the belt under the arm, behind the back • or otherwise out of position. Such use could far back. The shoulder belt must be taut cause injury in the event of an accident. As in order to function properly. G017726 seat belts lose much of their strength when • Do not use child safety seats or child Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console exposed to violent stretching, they should booster cushions/backrests in the front The seat belt reminder consists of an audible be replaced after any collision, even if they passenger's seat. We also recommend appear to be undamaged. that children who have outgrown these signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that belt properly fastened. alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and indicator light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds.

Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions:

19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

• It provides information about which seat Seat belt use during pregnancy a distance as possible between their belly and belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- the steering wheel. sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message Child seats will disappear after approximately 6 sec- Please refer to page 39 for information on onds or can be erased by pressing the securing child seats with the seat belts. READ button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be

given. These signals will stop when the G020998 seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. The seat belt should always be worn during • The message Unbelted in rear seat will pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the appear in the information display if one of correct way. The diagonal section should wrap the rear doors has been opened. over the shoulder then be routed between the The message in the information display can breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap always be accessed, even if it has been erased, section should lay flat over the thighs and as by pressing the READ button to display stored low as possible under the belly. It must never messages. be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large

20 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

General information properly, the general warning symbol illumi- WARNING nates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 74 and page 76 for more If your vehicle has been subjected to flood information about indicator and warning sym- conditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your bols. vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or WARNING insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see • If the SRS warning light stays on after below). This may cause airbag deployment the engine has started or if it illuminates which could result in personal injury. Have while you are driving, have the vehicle the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Volvo service technician as soon as Automatic transmission: possible. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: Warning symbols in the instrument panel • Never try to repair any component or As an enhancement to the three-point seat part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- 1. Switch off the ignition for at least belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- ence in the system could cause mal- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS function and serious injury. All work on 2. Follow the instructions for manually these systems should be performed by consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- overriding the shiftlock system on page a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, a front passenger 114. technician. occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or III, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning

21 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Front airbags The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment.

WARNING • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. G018665 Location of the passenger's side front airbag • Never drive with your hands on the As the movement of the seats' occupants com- steering wheel pad/airbag housing. The front airbag system presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- The front airbags supplement the three-point • The front airbags are designed to help led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- prevent serious injury. Deployment seat belts. For these airbags to provide the ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also protection intended, seat belts must be worn occurs very quickly and with consider- deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire able force. During normal deployment at all times. process, including inflation and deflation of the and depending on variables such as The front airbag system includes gas genera- airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- seating position, one may experience tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- ond. abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other tion sensors that activate the gas generators, The location of the front airbags is indicated by injuries as a result from deployment of causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel one or both of the airbags. gas. pad and above the glove compartment, and by • When installing any accessory equip- decals on both sun visors and on the front and ment, make sure that the front airbag far right side of the dash. system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause mal- The driver's side front airbag is folded and function. located in the steering wheel hub.

22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

Front airbag deployment WARNING Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • The front airbags are designed to deploy 1-800-458-1552 during certain frontal or front-angular col- • Do not use child safety seats or child lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- booster cushions/backrests in the front www.volvocars.us passenger's seat. We also recommend ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and In Canada object impacted. The airbags may also that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches deploy in certain non-frontal collisions (140 cm) in height who have outgrown Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. where rapid deceleration occurs. these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1. National Customer Service • The SRS sensors, which trigger the front airbags, are designed to react to both the • Never drive with the airbags deployed. 175 Gordon Baker Road impact of the collision and the inertial The fact that they hang out can impair North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 forces generated by it, and to determine if the steering of your vehicle. Other the intensity of the collision is sufficient for safety systems can also be damaged. 1-800-663-8255 the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags • The smoke and dust formed when the www.volvocars.ca to be deployed. airbags are deployed can cause skin However, not all frontal collisions activate the and eye irritation in the event of pro- front airbags. longed exposure. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed Should you have questions about any compo- object at a low speed, the front airbags will nent in the SRS system, please contact a not necessarily deploy. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision, in a collision from the In the USA rear or in a rollover situation. Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags Customer Care Center should have deployed or not. 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26.

23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

NOTE Airbag decals WARNING • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • Children must never be allowed in the one time during an accident. In a colli- front passenger's seat. sion where deployment occurs, the air- • Occupants in the front passenger's seat bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- must never sit on the edge of the seat, vate. Some noise occurs and a small sit leaning toward the instrument panel amount of powder is released. The or otherwise sit out of position. release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal • The occupant's back must be as upright characteristic and does not indicate fire. as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly G008335 • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- fastened. sors that are integrated with the front Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors seat buckles. The point at which the air- • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on bag deploys is determined by whether the dash, seat or out of the window. or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. • Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity.

Passenger's side airbag decal

24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01

WARNING • No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 22). • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

25 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be 2 NOTE enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, 2 or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system:

G017724 seat, • The OWS indicator light will stay on Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 21) will present in a rear-facing infant seat that is come on and stay on Disabling the passenger's side front installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service airbag urgen-64 will be displayed in the informa- Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults • the system determines that a small child is tion display. and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufac- (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any WARNING vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and turer's instructions, be properly restrained for their size and weight. • the system determines that a small child is If a fault in the system is detected and indi- For child safety recommendations,see present in a booster seat, cated as described, be aware that the pas- page 37. senger's side front airbag will not deploy in • a front passenger takes his/her weight off the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, system and Occupant Weight Sensor designed to meet the regulatory requirements • a child or a small person occupies the front should be inspected by a trained and quali- of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard passenger's seat. fied Volvo service technician as soon as (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will possible. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on under certain conditions. to remind you that the passenger's side front

26 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING Passeng- OWS indi- Passeng- BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. • Never try to open, remove, or repair any er's seat cator light er's side components in the OWS system. This occu- status front air- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front could result in system malfunction. pancy sta- bag status passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- Maintenance or repairs should only be tus BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that carried out by an a trained and qualified the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's this happens: cupied tor light side front The front passenger's seat should not • lights up. airbag disa- • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to be modified in any way. This could place the seatback in an upright position. bled reduce pressure on the seat cushion, • Have the person sit upright in the seat, which might interfere with the OWS sys- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's centered on the seat cushion, with the per- tem's function. pied by low tor light side front son's legs comfortably extended. weight lights up airbag disa- • Restart the vehicle and have the person occupant/ bled remain in this position for about two objectA minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the pas- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's senger's frontal airbag. pied by tor light is side front heavy occu- not lit airbag ena- • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator pant/object bled lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do This condition reflects limitations of the OWS not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction. any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in the passenger's side front airbag in the event any way to accommodate a disability, for of a collision anytime the system senses that a example by altering or adapting the driver's or person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR- tems, please contact Volvo at:

27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor

In the USA WARNING WARNING Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with Customer Care Center on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could 1 Volvo Drive seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function P.O. Box 914 with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- weight could cause the OWS system to pant of the front passenger's seat: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- 1-800-458-1552 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- thereby injuring the child. In Canada ion. The passenger should never lift • The seat belt should never be wrapped him/herself off the seat cushion using Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center National Customer Service er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario • The front passenger's seat belt should cushion, or by pressing against the M2H 2N7 never be used in a way that exerts more backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause 1-800-663-8255 pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exer- OWS to disable the front, passenger's ted on the weight sensor by a child, and side airbag. could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor 01

WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 37). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function.

29 01 Safety

01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags

General information NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

Components in the SIPS airbag system This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, G024377 and electronic sensors/wiring.

G032949 Driver's side SIPS airbag Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during cer-

tain side-impact collisions, depending on the G024378 crash severity, angle, speed and point of Passenger's side SIPS airbag impact. SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

30 01 Safety

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01

WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

31 01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

General information WARNING WARNING • The IC system is a supplement to the In order for the IC to provide its best pro- Side Impact Protection System. It is not tection, both front seat occupants and both designed to deploy during collisions outboard rear seat occupants should sit in from the rear of the vehicle or in rollover an upright position with the seat belt prop- situations. erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint sys- • Never try to open or repair any compo- tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats. nents of the IC system. This should be Children must never be allowed in the front done only by a trained and qualified passenger seat, see page 37 for guide- Volvo service technician. lines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an Never hang heavy items from the ceiling • accident. handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. This system consists of inflatable curtains • The rear seat should not be loaded to a located along the sides of the roof liners, level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the stretching from the center of both front side upper edge of the rear side windows. windows to the rear edge of the rear side door Objects placed higher than this level windows. It is designed to help protect the could impede the function of the Inflat- heads of the occupants of the front seats and able Curtain. the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur- tain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds.

32 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS 01

General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – WARNING front seats only Occupants in the front seats must never The WHIPS system consists of specially • sit out of position. The occupant's back designed hinges and brackets on the front seat must be as upright as comfort allows backrests designed to help absorb some of the and be against the seat back with the energy generated in a collision from the rear seat belt properly fastened. (when the vehicle is rear-ended). • If your vehicle has been involved in a In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges rear-end collision, the front seat back- and brackets of the front seat backrests are rests must be inspected by a trained designed to change position slightly to allow and qualified Volvo service technician, the backrest/head restraint to help support the even if the seats appear to be undam- occupant's head before moving slightly rear- aged. Certain components in the ward. This movement helps absorb some of WHIPS system may need to be the forces that could result in whiplash. replaced. • Do not attempt to service any compo- WARNING nent in the WHIPS system yourself. • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.

33 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS

WARNING WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind Any contact between the front seat back- the front seats could impede the func- rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-fac- tion of the WHIPS system. ing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded • If the rear seat backrests are folded down, the occupied front seats must be down, cargo must be secured to pre- adjusted forward so that they do not touch vent it from sliding forward against the the folded rear seat. front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system.

34 01 Safety

Crash mode 01

function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the sensors for one of the safety systems, the remote key in the ignition slot. brake system, etc. 3. Try to start the vehicle. WARNING If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven • Never attempt to repair the vehicle and must be towed. Concealed faults may yourself or to reset the electrical system make the vehicle difficult to control. after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode See manual. This could result in Moving the vehicle injury or improper system function. If the message Normal mode is displayed • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- when Safety mode See manual is no longer ing status should only be done by a displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully Driving after a collision trained and qualified Volvo service tech- from its present position, if for example, it is If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, nician. blocking traffic. It should, however, not be the text Safety mode See manual may • After Safety mode See manual has moved farther than is absolutely necessary. appear in the information display. This indi- been displayed, if you detect the odor cates that the vehicle's functionality has been of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel WARNING leakage, do not attempt to start the reduced. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. after Safety mode has been set, it should NOTE not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage This text can only be shown if the display is Attempting to start the vehicle If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is that could make it difficult or impossible to undamaged and the vehicle's electrical sys- control. The vehicle should be transported tem is intact. no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- vehicle. To do so: fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition repairs. or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side slot and open the driver's door. If a mes- airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of sage is displayed that the ignition is on, the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The press the start button. collision may have damaged an important

35 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- located on the hips (see the illustration on page vehicle. ing in your state or province. Recent accident 45). Legislation in your state or province may statistics have shown that children are safer in Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in rear seating positions than front seating posi- LATCH attachments, which make it more con- combination with the seat belt, depending on tions when properly restrained. A child restraint venient to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local system can help protect a child in a vehicle. regulations. Some restraint systems for children are Here's what to look for when selecting a child designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap restraint system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion and backrest can be obtained from your It should have a label certifying that it meets Such child restraint systems can help protect Volvo retailer. children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. dren could be endangered in a crash if the child CMVSS 213. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in height restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- Make sure the child restraint system is cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. for your child restraint can result in your child development – the label required by the stand- (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. ard or regulation, or instructions for infant in height Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable restraints, typically provide this information. substitute for a child restraint system. In an In using any child restraint system, we urge you accident, a child held in a person's arms can to carefully look over the instructions that are be crushed between the vehicle's interior and provided with the restraint. Be sure you under- an unrestrained person. The child could also be stand them and can use the device properly injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- and safely in this vehicle. A misused child ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver restraint system can result in increased injuries or impact. The same can also happen if the for both the infant or child and other occupants infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. in the vehicle. Other occupants should also be properly

36 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ • Do not use child safety seats or child ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that that children under 4 feet 7 inches seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices (140 cm) in height who have outgrown ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt taut. fastened. seat belt fastened. When attaching the seat belt to a child • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked seat: Volvo's recommendations and keep remote controls out of a 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit child’s reach. Unsupervised children according to the child seat manufacturer's in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be instructions. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. taught not to play in vehicles. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed • On hot days, the temperature in the 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the of inflation, a child should never be placed in vehicle interior can rise very quickly. buckle (lock) in the usual way. Exposure to these high temperatures the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- for even a short period of time can 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo cause heat-related injury or death. the child seat. has been an innovator in safety for over sev- Small children are particularly at risk. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our audible at this time and is normal. The belt will part. But we need your help. Please remember Child seat should always be registered. See now be locked in place. This function is auto- to put your children in the back seat, and page 38 for more information. matically disabled when the seat belt is buckle them up. unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific recommendations: • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents.

37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle. • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely!

Child restraint registration and recalls Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

38 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

Child restraints G022847 G023269

G022840 Convertible seat Booster cushion Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the The following section provides general infor- rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles mation on securing a child restraint using a equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If three-point seat belt. Refer to page 46–47 the severity of an accident were to cause the for information on securing a child restraint airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tion. tether anchorages.

39 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible.

40 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270

G022844 Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct er's seat WARNING click is audible. • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing NOTE position only. Refer to page 46–47 for information on • The infant seat should not be positioned securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ behind the driver's seat unless there is LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether adequate space for safe installation. anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat

according to the manufacturer's instruc- G023271 tions. Fasten the seat belt

41 01 Safety

01 Infant seats G022846 G022850

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat out as far as possible to activate the belt's belt path to ensure that it is held securely automatic locking function. in place by the seat belt.

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound the seat belt and letting it retract completely. from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

42 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING belt • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G018630 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- WARNING installation. senger's seat Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the con- NOTE vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat tions. according to the manufacturer's instruc- Refer to pages 46 and 47 for information tions. on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat anchorages. of the vehicle.

Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

43 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022848 G022850

Fasten the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch G022849 plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING click is audible. 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the out as far as possible to activate the belt's securely in place by the seat belt. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the automatic locking function. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity WARNING of an accident were to cause the airbag to NOTE inflate, this could lead to serious injury or It should not be possible to move the child death to a child seated in this position. The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. The convertible seat can be removed by 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A completely. sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this

44 01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

Securing a booster cushion G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt Position the child correctly on the booster cushion 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Booster cushions are recommended for chil- fits snugly around the child. dren who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. • The hip section of the three-point seat belt must fit snugly across the child's 2. With the child properly seated on the hips, not across the stomach. booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man- • The shoulder section of the three-point ufacturer's instructions. seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch • The shoulder belt must never be placed plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct behind the child's back or under the click is audible. arm.

45 01 Safety

01 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child 3. Fasten the attachment on the child seat anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for G018631 weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors NOTE Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped WARNING child seats are located in the rear, outboard • The rear seat's center position is not Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower • rectly to the anchor (see the illustration). Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchors. When installing a child If the attachment is not correctly fas- anchor positions as shown. To access the restraint in this position, attach the tened, the child restraint may not be anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage properly secured in the event of a colli- the anchors by feel. Always follow your child sion. seat manufacturer's installation instructions, point and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt. and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint and top tethers whenever possible. • Always follow your child seat manufac- anchors are only intended for use with turer's installation instructions, and use child seats positioned in the outboard To access the anchors both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and seating positions. These anchors are 1. Put the child restraint in position. top tethers whenever possible. not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down seating position. When securing a child the seat cushion and locate the anchors by restraint in the center seating position, feel. use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

46 01 Safety

Top tether anchors 01

Child restraint anchorages not equipped with lower tether straps, or WARNING the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a • Never route a top tether strap over the child restraint using the Automatic Locking top of the head restraint. The strap Retractor seat belt (see page 37). should be routed beneath the head restraint. 6. Firmly tension all straps. • Child restraint anchorages are designed Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's to withstand only those loads imposed instructions for information on securing the by correctly fitted child restraints. Under child seat. no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top seat belts are installed to them. An adult tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are who uses a belt anchored in a child located on the rear parcel shelf. restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a colli- Securing a child seat sion occur. Do not install rear speakers that require 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. • the removal of the top tether anchors or 2. Fold up the plastic cover over the anchor- interfere with the proper use of the top age to be used. tether strap. 3. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor. 4. Fold down the outboard head restraints or lower the center head restraint for easier access to the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor. 5. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISO- FIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is

47 01 Safety

01 Child safety locks

Child safety locks G021077

Child safety locks – rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls. The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position. The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical position.

48 01 Safety

49 Remote key and key blade...... 52 Valet locking ...... 59 Keyless drive...... 60 Locks...... 63 Alarm...... 67

50 LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Introduction the valet locking function. The key blades have The number of registered keys for the vehicle Two remote keys or optional Personal Car a unique code, which is used if new ones need can be found by pressing MY CAR and going 02 Communicators (PCC) are provided with your to be produced. This code is available at an into Information Number of keys. See vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors authorized Volvo retailer. page 127 for a description of the menu sys- and trunk, and also function as ignition keys to tem. Loss of a remote key start the vehicle or operate electrical compo- If either of the remote keys is lost, the other USA-5WK49264 nents. The remote keys contain detachable should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. metal key blades for manually locking or FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- 5WK49236 remote key must be erased from the system. partment. Up to six remotes can be pro- FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 grammed for use on the same vehicle. NOTE FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO The PCCs have enhanced functionality com- 5WK49233 pared with the standard remote key. Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo FCC ID:KR55WK49233 Retailer. NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC You can also obtain additional or duplicate rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the In the remainder of this chapter, all referen- remote control keys from certain independ- ces to the remote key also pertain to the ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are following conditions: (1) This device may not PCC unless otherwise stated. qualified to make remote control keys. Each cause harmful interference, and (2) this device key must be programmed to work with your must accept any interference received, includ- vehicle. ing interference that may cause undesired WARNING California Only: operation. Never leave the remote key in the ignition if A list of independent repair facilities and/or Canada-5WK49264 children are to remain in the vehicle. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO code replacement keys can be found: 5WK49236 Detachable key blade on the Volvo website at • IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys metal key blade for mechanically locking or by calling Volvo Customer Care at IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO unlocking the driver's door and the glove com- • 1-800-458-1552 5WK49233 partment, and to enable the valet locking function. See page 57 for more information on the IC:267T-5WK49233 key blade and see page 59 for information on

52 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Operation is subject to the following condi- functions activated, the following will occur confirmation light by pressing OK/ tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: MENU. ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- 02 Locking confirmation • To activate audible confirmation: go to ference, including interference that may cause The turn signals flash once, an audible sig- Settings Car settings Lock undesired operation of the device. • nal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* settings and select Audible Key memory: door mirrors and driver's in. confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. seat Confirmation will only be given when all doors See page 127 for a description of the menu The position of the side door mirrors and power and the trunk are properly closed and locked. system. driver's seat are stored in the remote keys Immobilizer (start inhibitor) when the vehicle is locked. The next time the NOTE Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle driver's door is unlocked with the same remote If you do not receive confirmation when contains a coded transponder. The code in the key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, locking the vehicle, check whether a door or key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition the power driver's seat and side door mirrors the trunk is ajar, or if this feature has been slot where it is compared to the code stored in will automatically move to the position that they turned off in the menu. the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start were in when the doors were most recently only with a properly coded key. If you misplace locked with the same remote key. See page Unlocking confirmation a key, take the other keys to a trained and 83 for more information. • The turn signals will flash twice and the qualified Volvo service technician for reprog- This feature can be activated or deactivated in door mirrors will fold* out. ramming as an anti-theft measure. The follow- the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and Making a setting ing messages (which may appear in the instru- going into Settings Car settings Car Different alternatives for locking/unlocking ment panel display) are related to the immobil- key memory. See page 127 for a description confirmation can be selected in the menus by izer: of the menu system. pressing MY CAR on the center console con- See also page 60 for information regarding trol panel. vehicles with the optional keyless drive. • To activate visual confirmation: go to Settings Car settings Light Confirmation when locking/unlocking settings and select Door lock the vehicle confirmation light and/or Unlock Settings can be made in the menu system for audible and visual confirmation when the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With these

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Message Meaning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Common functions: Remote key/ rules. Operation is subject to the following con- Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* 02 Insert car key Remote key not rec- dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful ognized during start. interference, and (2) this device must accept Try to start the vehi- any interference received, including interfer- cle again. ence that may cause undesired operation.

Car key not found PCC with keyless Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO drive only. Remote Operation is subject to the following condi- key not recognized tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- during start. Try to ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- start the vehicle ference, including interference that may cause again. undesired operation of the device. If the problem con- See page 109 for information on starting the G021079 tinues, insert the vehicle. Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* remote key into the ignition slot and try Replacing the battery in the remote key Lock The batteries should be replaced if: to start the vehicle Unlock again. • The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control. Please Approach lighting Immobilizer Try Remote key fault change batteries. is shown in the display start again during start. Contact Trunk unlock/open and/or an authorized Volvo Panic alarm workshop. • if the locks do not react after several attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle. Buttons on the remote Lock – Press the Lock button on the CAUTION NOTE remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. Never use force when inserting the remote The remote key's range is normally approx- The turn signals will flash once to confirm lock- key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot imately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. be started if the transponder is damaged. ing. Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the See page 57 for information on replacing the USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO remote once to unlock the driver's door. battery.

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

After a short pause, press the Unlock button a NOTE NOTE second time within 10 seconds to unlock the other doors and the trunk. Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk Buildings or other obstacles may interfere 02 lid may prevent it from opening. with the function of the remote key. The This function can be changed so that all doors vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with unlock at the same time by pressing My Car the key blade, see page 57. See also page 64 for information on opening and going to Settings Car settings the trunk from the passenger compartment. Lock settings Change doors unlock After closing, the trunk will not automatically Unique functions—PCC* setting. See page 127 for a description of the relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the menu system. alarm. Approach lighting – As you approach the Panic alarm – This button can be used to vehicle, press the button on the remote key to attract attention during emergency situations. light the interior lighting, parking lights, license plate lighting and the lights in the door mir- To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this rors*. button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will These lights will switch off automatically after be activated. The panic alarm will stop auto- 30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 127 for a matically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. description of the menu system.

To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds G021080 Unlock/open trunk and press the button again. Information button Press once: This unlocks the trunk (but does The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehi- not open it) and disarms the alarm and optional cle. Indicator lights movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out). If the trunk is not Range Pressing the information button provides cer- opened within two minutes it will automatically The remote key has a range of approximately tain information about the vehicle with the help relock and the alarm will be rearmed. 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. of the indicator lights. Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and Using the information button pops it open slightly. 1. Press the information button .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequen- NOTE tially for approximately 7 seconds to indi- 02 cate that the PCC is receiving information • The approach lighting, panic alarm, and from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are the functions controlled by the informa- pressed during this 7-second period, tion button have a range of approxi- transmission of information to the PCC will mately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle. be interrupted. • Radio waves, buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of NOTE the PCC. If none of the indicator lights flash when the information button has been pressed sev- If the vehicle does not provide confirmation eral times from different places in relation to when a button has been pressed, try moving the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly closer and pressing the button again. service technician. locked. Outside of the PCC´s range Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft The indicator lights provide information locked. (100 m) from the vehicle when the information according to the illustration: Steady red light: the alarm has been trig- button is pressed, no new information will be gered. received. The PCC most recently used to lock or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm most recently received status. The indicator was triggered less than 5 minutes ago. lights will not flash when the information button Range is pressed while the PCC is out of range. The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the the vehicle, only the one used most recently will vehicle. show the correct locking status.

56 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

NOTE Removing the key blade wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only. If none of the indicator lights illuminate when 02 the information button is pressed, this may be because the most recent transmission NOTE between the vehicle and the PCC was inter- After unlocking the driver's door with the rupted or impeded by buildings or other key blade, opening the door will trigger the objects. alarm.

Keyless drive To disable the alarm: Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This Car Communicator have the keyless drive also applies to vehicles equipped with the function, see page 60 for detailed informa- G021082 optional keyless drive. tion. Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. Replacing batteries in the remote key/ Detachable key blade Pull the key blade straight out of the remote PCC The key blade can be removed from the remote key. The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC key. When removed, the key blade can be used should be replaced if: to: Reinserting the key blade in the remote key • The information symbol lights up and a text • Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the appears in the information display. key is not functioning properly key blade up. and/or • Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see page 64) 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove when a button on the remote key/PCC is • Enable/disable the valet locking function pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m) until it clicks into place. (see page 59) from the vehicle. • The trunk can be opened manually if nec- Unlocking the doors with the detached essary (see page 64) key blade Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock-

57 02 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Opening the remote key/PCC PCC (two batteries) Slide the spring loaded catch to the 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- 02 side. teries. Pull the key blade straight out of the 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side remote key. upward. 3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. Insert a small screwdriver in the hole Insert the second new battery on top of the behind the spring loaded catch and care- plastic spacer, with the + side downward. fully pry up the cover. Re-assembling the remote key NOTE 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. Turn the remote key with the buttons 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the upward so that the batteries do not fall out key blade up. when the cover is removed. 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Replacing the batteries 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. CAUTION Old batteries should be properly recycled. When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides. Remote key (one battery) 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat- Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the tery. remote key, two batteries in the PCC) 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward.

58 02 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Blocking access to the trunk to block access to the trunk and glove com- Turn the key blade180 degrees clockwise. partment for e.g., valet parking or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer for service. Remove the key blade from the lock. A 02 message will appear in the instrument With the valet locking function activated: panel display. • The vehicle's doors can be locked or unlocked with the remote Deactivating the valet locking function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclock- • The engine can be started wise in the glove compartment lock to deacti- • The glove compartment cannot be vate valet locking. unlocked See page 64 for information on locking the Access to the trunk is blocked (the trunk lid • glove compartment normally, without activat- cannot be unlocked or opened with the G021083 ing the valet locking function. remote, and the rear seat backrests cannot Normal locking/unlocking function be lowered Activating the valet locking function G021084

Locking/unlocking points with valet locking activated By utilizing the remote key with the key blade Insert the key blade in the glove compart- removed, the valet locking feature enables you ment lock.

59 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

Keyless drive* (models with Personal NOTE Lock settings Keyless entry. See page Car Communicator only) 127 for a description of the menu system. 02 • The gear selector must in the P position Keyless locking and unlocking before the vehicle can be locked and the alarm can be armed. NOTE • The buttons on the keyless drive remote If the PCC does not function normally (weak key can also be used to lock and unlock battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked the vehicle, see page 54 for more infor- with the detachable key blade, see mation. page 57.

Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the have the keyless function, and additional ones key blade can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs.

G020577 The red rings in the illustration indicate the area Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft around the vehicle that is within range of the (1.5 meters) keyless drive antennas. This system makes it possible to unlock and Unlocking the vehicle lock the vehicle without having to press any • A keyless drive remote key must be on the buttons on the Personal Car Communicators same side of the vehicle as the door to be (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) drive remote key in your possession to operate of the door's lock or the trunk (see the sha- the central locking system. ded areas in the illustration). • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the Keyless drive keyhole cover door or press the trunk opening control on The driver's door on vehicles equipped with the trunk lid. keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with The number of doors that are unlocked at the the remote key's detachable key blade if nec- same time can be set in the vehicle's menu essary, see page 57 for information on remov- system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings ing the key blade from the remote key. To access the keyhole in the driver's door:

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) The doors and the trunk can be locked by See also page 83 for information on adjusting straight up in the hole on the underside of pressing the lock button in any of the outside and storing the seat's position in the seat mem- the keyhole cover. door handles. ory. 02 > The cover will come off due to the pres- Keyless drive information messages sure exerted when the key blade is NOTE If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle pushed upward. On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector while the engine is running or if the ignition is 2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the must be in the Park (P) position, all doors in mode II (see page 80) and all of the doors driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to and the trunk must be closed and the igni- are closed, a message will appear in the instru- unlock the driver's door only. This will trig- tion must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked. ment panel display and an audible signal will ger the alarm. Press the remote key into the sound. ignition slot to turn off the alarm. Keyless drive remote key and driver's When at least one PCC has been returned to 3. Press the cover back into place after the seat/door mirror memory the car, the message will be erased in the dis- door has been unlocked. • When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in play and the audible signal will stop when: Locking the vehicle your possession and lock any door, the • A door has been opened and closed position of the driver's seat and door mir- • The PCC has been inserted in the ignition rors will be stored in the seat's memory. slot • The next time a door is opened by a person • The READ button (see page 125 for the with the same PCC in his/her possession, location of this button) has been pressed. the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently locked.

NOTE If several people carrying PCCs approach the vehicle at the same time, the driver's Models with keyless drive have a button on the seat and door mirrors will assume the posi- outside door handles tions they were in for the person who opens the driver's door.

61 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive

CAUTION For Automobile Use The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehi- Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, 02 • Keyless drive remote keys should never cle. be left in the vehicle. In the event of a 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 On the inside center of the rear bumper break-in, a remote found in the vehicle NOTE could make it possible to start the Left rear door handle engine. This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following Electromagnetic fields or metal Center of the parcel shelf, on the underside • two conditions: (1) This device may not cause obstructions can interfere with the key- harmful interference, and (2) this device must Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat less drive system. Avoid placing the accept interference received, including inter- remote key near cellular phones, metal- Right rear door handle lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. ference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Under the rear section of the center console USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 Changes or modifications not expressly Under the front section of the center con- NOTE approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. sole. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two WARNING conditions: (1) This device may not cause Location of the keyless drive antennas People with implanted pacemakers should harmful interference, and (2) this device must not allow the pacemaker to come closer accept interference received, including inter- than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless ference that may cause undesired operation. drive system's antennas. This is to help pre- CAUTION vent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Siemens VDO 5WK48891 G020479 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

62 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Locking and unlocking the vehicle From inside the vehicle (central locking Locking button) • Press the lock button after the front 02 From outside the vehicle doors have been closed. The remote key locks and unlocks all of the doors and the trunk. • Each door can be locked individually with the lock button on the respective doors. Before the vehicle can be locked from the out- The door must be closed first. side with the remote key, the driver's door must Alternative locking when parking be closed. Any other door/trunk that is open The central locking button on the driver's door will be locked and the alarm will be armed. can also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave it. To do so: NOTE 1. Open the door. Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/trunk are 2. Press the lock section of the button. closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle. Central locking button 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm. The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the trunk at the If the vehicle is equipped with the optional key- NOTE less drive system, all doors/trunk must be same time. Press to lock and to closed before the vehicle can be locked. unlock. Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the The first press on the unlock button unlocks the Unlocking remote key in the passenger compartment. driver's door and a second press unlocks the The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the other doors and the trunk (see also page 54). vehicle in two ways: outside by pressing the lock button on the This setting can be changed in the menu sys- remote key. • By pressing the unlock button . tem, see page 128. If the vehicle is locked using the central The door can be unlocked by pulling the If the locks repeatedly do not react when the • locking button, be sure that the remote key door handle once and opened by pulling is in your possession before closing the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary the handle again. door. to replace the batteries in the remote, see page 54. In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 57.

63 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Automatic relocking on removing the key blade from the remote will automatically relock and the alarm will be If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- key. rearmed. 02 matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will Press twice: This both unlocks the trunk and Insert the key blade in the glove compart- rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk pops it open slightly. has been opened. ment lock. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. Automatic locking NOTE When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and Remove the key blade from the lock. Any excess weight (snow, etc.) on the trunk trunk can be locked automatically. This feature lid may prevent it from opening. can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR Locking/unlocking the trunk and going to Car settings Lock settings The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will Automatic door locking. See page 127 for go out to indicate that the alarm is not moni- a description of the menu system. toring the entire vehicle. The accessory movement and inclination sensors will be automati- Glove compartment cally disconnected. When the trunk is closed again (which has to be done manually), it will have to be relocked and the alarm rearmed by pressing the lock button on the remote key.

Trunk unlock button on the remote key Unlocking the trunk with the remote key Press the trunk unlock button on the remote. Press once: This unlocks but does not open The glove compartment can only be locked the trunk. The trunk can then be opened by and unlocked using the detachable key blade pressing the rubber plate near the trunk lock. If in the remote key. See page 57 for information the trunk is not opened within two minutes it

64 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Unlocking/opening the trunk from the Unlocking the trunk with the key blade Locking the trunk with the remote key passenger compartment Press the lock button on the remote, see page 54 02 The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and that the alarm has been armed.

NOTE • If the doors are locked while the trunk is open, the trunk will remain unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by pressing the Lock button on the remote key. G022853 • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to all doors and the trunk must be closed unlock and pop open the trunk and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked. NOTE The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the trunk has been If the remote key is not functioning properly, opened. the trunk can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 57 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. Pull out the cover over the trunk’s keyhole.

Unlock the trunk by inserting the key blade in the keyhole and turning a half turn counterclockwise as shown in the illustration.

65 02 Locks and alarm

Locks

Opening the trunk from the inside (U.S. WARNING models only) 02 • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked and keep keys out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. • On hot days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related

G022920 injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. Opening the trunk from the inside The vehicle is equipped with a florescent handle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be used in an emergency situation to open the trunk from the inside. Pull the handle down to release the trunk lid. After use, the handle must be pushed back into its original position before the trunk can be closed. This handle is not intended to be used to anchor the trunk lid when long loads are being transported.

66 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

The alarm system NOTE Arming the alarm The alarm is automatically armed whenever the Press the Lock button on the remote key. Do not attempt to repair any of the compo- 02 vehicle is locked with the remote key or nents in the alarm system yourself. This One long flash of the turn signals will con- optional Personal Car Communicator. could affect the insurance policy on the firm that the alarm is armed. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors vehicle. Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in a number of points on the vehicle. The follow- MY CAR, under Car settings Lock ing conditions will trigger the alarm: The alarm indicator light settings Keyless entry. See page 127 for • The hood is forced open. a description of the menu system. • The trunk is forced open USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) • A door is forced open. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC • The ignition slot is tampered with. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- • An attempt is made to start the vehicle with ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful a non-approved key (a key not coded to interference, and (2) this device must accept the car's ignition). any interference received, including interfer- • If there is movement in the passenger com- ence that may cause undesired operation. partment (if the vehicle is equipped with Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) the accessory movement sensor). • The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is equipped with the accessory inclination The status of the alarm system is indicated by is subject to the following conditions: (1) this sensor). the red indicator light on the dashboard (see device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including • The battery is disconnected (while the illustration): interference that may cause undesired opera- alarm is armed). Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed • tion of the device. • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes at one-second is disarmed. intervals – the alarm is armed A message will appear in the information dis- • The indicator light flashes rapidly before play if a fault should occur in the alarm system. the remote key is inserted in the ignition Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the technician. alarm has been triggered.

67 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning Reduced alarm function Press the Unlock button on the remote key. If the remote key is not functioning properly, 02 Turning off the accessory alarm sensors > Two short flashes from the car's direc- the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows: In certain situations it may be desirable to turn tion indicators confirm that the alarm off the accessory inclination and movement has been deactivated and that all doors 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your are unlocked. (see page 57 for information on detaching vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the the key blade). boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in Turning off (stopping) the alarm > This will trigger the alarm. the vehicle with the doors locked. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by The vehicle's menu system is used for turning pressing the Unlock button on the remote key off these sensors (see page 127 for a descrip- or by inserting the remote key in the ignition tion of the menu system). slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been 1. Go into the menu under Car settings. turned off. 2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/ MENU to choose). Other alarm-related functions 3. Two alternatives are now available: Automatic re-arming • Activate once. If this alternative is If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- selected, Reduced guard See matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will manual will appear in the instrument re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the panel display and the accessory incli- trunk has been opened. 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot nation and movement alarm sensors will (also on vehicles with the optional keyless be deactivated when the vehicle is Audible/visual alarm signal drive). This will turn off the alarm. locked. • An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- 3. Start the engine. • Ask when exiting. If this alternative is tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts selected, a message will appear in the for 30 seconds. center console display each time the • The visual alarm signal is given by flashing engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes accept and the accessory inclination or until the alarm is turned off. and movement alarm sensors will be

68 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm

deactivated when the vehicle is locked. Press EXIT to cancel. 02 4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle. The next time the engine is started, the alarm system will be reset and Full guard will appear in the instrument panel display. The accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be reactivated. In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle.

69 Instruments and controls...... 72 Ignition modes...... 80 Seats...... 82 Steering wheel...... 88 Lighting...... 90 Wipers and washers...... 96 Power windows...... 99 Mirrors...... 101 Compass*...... 103 Power moonroof*...... 104 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*...... 106 Starting the engine...... 109 Transmission...... 113 Brakes...... 116 Parking brake...... 119

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

72 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Function Page Menus and mes- 127, 93, In-door control pan- 99, 101, Power seat* adjust- 82 sages, turn signals, 90, 142 els (power win- 48, 63 ment controls high/low beams, dows, mirrors, trip computer power child safety Lighting panel, but- 90, 264, tons for opening 64 locks, central lock- 03 Cruise control 147 ing button) fuel filler door and unlocking and Horn, airbag 89, 22 Menu controls, info- 127, 200, opening the trunk tainment and cli- 136 Main instrument 73 mate control sys- panel tems Information displays

Audio system/Blue- 200, 229 Center console but- 127 tooth hands-free tons controls Gear selector 113 START/STOP 80 ENGINE button Controls for active 146 chassis (Four-C)* Ignition slot 80 Wipers and washers 96, 97 Hazard warning 93 flashers Steering wheel 88 adjustment Door handle – Information displays in the instrument panel Parking brake 119 The information displays show information on Hood opening con- 309 some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise trol control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

More detailed information can be found in the in the red area of the gauge. The engine When the engine has started, all the symbols descriptions of the functions that use the infor- management system will automatically should go out except the parking brake sym- mation displays. prevent excessively high engines speeds. bol, which only goes out when the brake is dis- This will be noticeable as a pronounced engaged. unevenness in engine speed. Gauges If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all sym- 03 Indicator, information, and warning bols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol symbols for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may not have their functions illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Indicator and information symbols Symbol Description Fault in the Active Bending Gauges in the instrument panel Light (ABL)*system Speedometer Malfunction indicator light Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level Indicator and warning symbols indicator in the gauge moves from right to High beam and turn signal indicators Anti-lock brake system (ABS) left as the amount of fuel in the tank decreases. The arrow indicates the side of Indicator and warning symbols Rear fog light on the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See also the section on refueling beginning on Information symbols page 262. See page 142 for more infor- Indicator and warning symbols Stability system mation on fuel level and consumption. The tachometer shows engine speed in Function check Tire pressure monitoring sen- thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). All indicator and warning symbols light up in sor (TPMS) Do not drive continuously with the needle ignition mode II or when the engine is started.

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Description condition that potentially may need correcting. If the warning light remains on, the vehicle When this happens, please have your vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Low fuel level checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- Volvo service technician for inspection, see ice technician as soon as possible. page 116 for additional information.

Information symbol, see text A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light Canadian models are equipped with this in information display may have many causes. Sometimes, you may symbol. not notice a change in your car's behavior. 03 High beam indicator Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt Rear fog light fuel economy, emission controls, and drivabil- This symbol indicates that the rear fog light Left turn signal indicator ity. Extended driving without correcting the (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is cause could even damage other components on. in your vehicle. Right turn signal indicator Stability system This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC The stability system's Sport not closed tightly or if the engine was running (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control sys- mode is activated. while the vehicle was refueled. tem) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, see page 144 for more detailed information. Canadian models are equipped with this Fault in the Active Bending Light symbol. Tire pressure monitoring system (ABL) system Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (TPMS)* This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault warning light pressure in one or more tires is low, see in the ABL system. See page 91 for more If the warning light comes on, there may be a page 301 for detailed information. information about this system. malfunction in the ABS system (the standard Malfunction Indicator Light braking system will still function). Check the Low fuel level As you drive, a computer called On-Board system by: When this light comes on, the vehicle should Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off be refueled as soon as possible. See page engine, transmission, electrical and emission the ignition. 262 for information about fuel and refueling. systems. 2. Restart the engine. Information symbol The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) The information symbol lights up and a text 3. If the warning light goes off, no further light will illuminate if the computer senses a message is displayed to provide the driver with action is required.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

necessary information about one of the vehi- example when driving with snow chains, or Parking brake applied cle's systems. The message can be erased and driving in deep snow or loose sand. This symbol illuminates when the parking the symbol can be turned off by pressing the brake is applied. On models equipped with the Indicator and warning symbols READ button (see page 125 for information) or electric parking brake, this symbol flashes this will take place automatically after a short Symbol Description while the brake is being applied and then glows time (the length of time varies, depending on steadily. 03 the function affected). Low oil pressure A flashing symbol means that a fault has been The information symbol may also illuminate detected. See the message in the information Parking brake applied together with other symbols. display. High beam indicator SRS airbags Canadian models are equipped with this This symbol illuminates when the high beam symbol. headlights are on, or if the high beam flash function is used. Seat belt reminder See page 119 for more information about using the parking brake. Left turn signal indicator Generator not charging Airbags – SRS Right turn signal indicator If this light comes on while the vehicle is being Fault in the brake system driven, or remains on for longer than approxi- NOTE mately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions Both turn signal indicators will flash Warning symbol • have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pre- when the hazard warning flashers are tensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, used. Low oil pressure and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) • If either of these indicators flash faster inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo If the light comes on while driving, stop the than normal, the direction indicators are service technician as soon as possible. not functioning properly. vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is nor- See page 21 for more information about the mal and the light stays on after restart, have the airbag system. Sport mode vehicle towed to the nearest trained and quali- This symbol illuminates to indicate that the sta- fied Volvo service technician. This is normal, bility system's Sport mode has been activated provided it goes off when the engine speed is to help provide maximum tractive force, for increased.

76 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Seat belt reminder MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an WARNING This symbol comes on for approximately 6 sec- authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark onds if the driver has not fastened his or her in the reservoir or if a warning message seat belt. Canadian models are equipped with this is displayed in the text window: DO Generator not charging symbol. NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service This symbol comes on during driving if a fault If the and symbols come on at the technician and have the brake system 03 has occurred in the electrical system. Contact same time, there may be a fault in the brake inspected. an authorized Volvo workshop. force distribution system. • If the ABS and Brake system lights are Engine temperature 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off on at the same time, there is a risk of Engine overheating can result from low oil or the engine. reduced vehicle stability. coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. 2. Restart the engine. Engine overheating will be signaled with text • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- Warning symbol and a red warning triangle in the middle of the ing. The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a instrument display. The exact text will depend problem related to safety and/or drivability. A If the symbols remain on, check the level in on the degree of overheating. It may range from • message will also appear in the main instru- the brake fluid reservoir, see page 312. If ments panel's display. The symbol remains High engine temp Reduce speed to High the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, visible until the fault has been rectified but the other messages, such as Coolant level low, with great care, to an authorized Volvo text message can be cleared with the READ Stop safely will also be displayed. If your workshop to have the brake system button, see page 125. The warning symbol can engine does overheat so that you must stop the checked. also come on in conjunction with other sym- engine, always allow the engine to cool before bols. • If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the attempting to check oil and coolant levels. vehicle should be transported to an author- Action: ized Volvo workshop to have the brake See page 312 for more information. 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehi- system checked. Fault in brake system cle further. If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may 2. Read the information on the information be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and display. Implement the action in accord- check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see ance with the message in the display. Clear page 312. If the level in the reservoir is below the message using READ.

77 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Reminder – doors not closed Odometer display Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise If one of the doors, the hood or trunk lid is not to set the time. The set time is shown in the Button for toggling between T1 and T2, closed properly, the information or warning information display. and for resetting the odometer symbol comes on together with an explanatory The clock may be temporarily replaced by a The trip odometers are used to measure short text message in the instrument panel. Stop the symbol in conjunction with a message, see distances. A short press the button toggles vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and page 125. 03 close the door, hood or trunk. between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an If the vehicle is driven at a speed Setting the clock in MY CAR active trip odometer to zero. The distance is lower than approximately 5 mph In addition to setting the clock manually as shown in the display. (7 km/h), the information symbol comes on. described above, it can also be set in the MY CAR menu system. See page 127 for addi- If the vehicle is driven at a speed Clock tional information about these menus. higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on.

Trip odometers

Clock and setting control 1. Go to Settings System options Display Time. Control for setting the clock 2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to Trip odometers and reset button activate this box.

78 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and press OK to activate this box (B). 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK to confirm the setting and deac- 03 tivate this box. 6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to complete the procedure. Use the menu selection Settings System options Time format to display the time in the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/ PM).

79 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Inserting and removing the remote key Removing the remote key Returning to mode 0 from mode I The remote key can be removed from the igni- Open the driver's door. tion slot by pulling it out. Ignition mode functions Ignition modes The various ignition modes are accessed with the remote key in the ignition slot1. 03 Ignition mode 0 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and press it in as far as possible1. Posi- Function tion Ignition mode I 0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. The NOTE infotainment system can be START/STOP Ignition slot with remote key and To access ignition modes I or II without star- used. ENGINE button. ting the engine, the brake pedal must not be The steering lock is deactivated. Inserting the remote key1 depressed. I Moonroof*, power windows,12- Holding the end of the remote key with the volt sockets, navigation system*, base of the key blade, insert the remote key With the remote key fully pressed into the climate system blower, ECC, into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration ignition slot1, press START/STOP windshield wipers can be used. and press it in as far as possible (past the ENGINE briefly. detent). II The headlights/taillights come Ignition mode II on. Warning/indicator lights With the remote key fully pressed into the CAUTION come on for 5 seconds. All equip- ignition slot1, press START/STOP ment operates apart from heated Foreign objects in the ignition slot can ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. impair function or cause damage. seats* and rear window Returning to mode I from mode II defroster, which only work when With the remote key fully pressed into the igni- the engine is running. tion slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly.

1 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Ignition modes

Starting and stopping the engine See page 109 for information on starting the engine and switching it off.

Emergency towing See page 273 for more information. 03

81 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The Without releasing the catches, push the seat should be adjusted so that the backrest forward. brake pedal can be depressed fully. In Move the seat as far forward as possible addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. so that the head restraint slides under the 03 glove compartment. • Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting. WARNING

Folding the front seat backrest • When transporting long objects, cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer stops. or softer lumbar support. • When the seat's backrest is returned to Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and the upright position, push and pull it to move the seat to the position of your be sure that it is securely locked in this choice. position. Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for Control panel for power seat*. a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back and down as possible. Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat* NOTE Programming the memory Three different seating and door mirror posi- • Only one of the power seat's controls tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. can be used at the same time. The following example explains how button (1) • The power seats have an overload pro- tector that activates if a seat is blocked can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are programmed in the same way. by any object. If this occurs, switch off 03 the ignition (key in position 0) and wait To program (store) a seat position and door for a short period before operating the mirror position in button (1): seat again. 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired position using the seat and mirror Seat with memory function adjustment controls. 2. Press and hold down the memory button Front edge of seat cushion up/down (4). Seat forward/rearward and up/down 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current posi- Backrest tilt tion for the seat/mirrors. Operation To move the seat and mirrors to the position The seats can be adjusted for a short period that they were in when a button was pro- after unlocking the door with the remote con- grammed: trol without the key in the ignition slot. Seat Press and hold down button (1) until the adjustment is normally made when the ignition seat and mirrors stop moving. is on and can always be made when the engine is running. Stored seat position NOTE Stored seat position As a safety precaution, the seat will stop Stored seat position automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position. Memory button

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Remote keyless entry system and the 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same Emergency stop driver's seat and door mirrors1 remote control (the one used to lock the If the seat accidentally begins to move, press doors). one of the buttons to stop the seat. 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. WARNING The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- Because the driver's seat can be 03 matically move to the position in which you left • them. adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the NOTE vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED • The key memory is independent of the at any time by pressing any button on seat memory. the power seat control panel. • The seat will move to this position even • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The if someone else has moved it to a dif- seat should be adjusted so that the The remote control transmitter also controls ferent seating position and locked the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In the position of the power driver's seat and door vehicle with a different remote control. addition, position the seat as far rear- mirrors in the following way: • This feature will work in the same way ward as comfort and control allow. with all of the remote control transmit- 1. Adjust the seat to your preferences. • The seat rails on the floor must not be ters that you use with your vehicle. obstructed in any way when the seat is 2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using in motion. the remote control. The function can be activated/deactivated The position of the driver's seat and door mir- under MY CAR under Settings Car Heated/ventilated seats* rors is now stored in the remote control's mem- settings Car key memory Position of See page 136. ory. door mirrors and driver's seat in key. See Automatic seat/mirror adjustment page 127 for a description of the menu sys- To move the seat and door mirrors to the posi- tem. tion in which you left them:

1 See page 61 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Rear seats The center head restraint should be adjusted Automatically folding down the rear according to the passenger's height. The seat’s outboard head restraints Rear center head restraint restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head. • Pull the head restraint up as required. To lower, press the button at the base of • 03 the head restraint’s left support while pressing the head restrain down.

WARNING The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s 1. The ignition must be in mode I or II. height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper- 2. Press the button to lower the rear head most point of the seat occupant's ear. restraints for improved visibility.

NOTE • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.

85 03 Your driving environment

Seats

CAUTION 1. Pull the release control handle(s). WARNING The rear head restraints should not be kept 2. Fold the backrest forward. Adjust the cen- • Keep vehicle doors and trunk locked folded down for prolonged periods. This ter seat head restraint if necessary. and keep keys out of a child’s reach. could result in pressure marks in leather Unsupervised children could lock them- upholstery. NOTE selves in an open trunk and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in 03 When the backrests are folded down, move WARNING the outboard head restraints forward vehicles. slightly so that they do not catch on the seat • On hot days, the temperature in the For safety reasons, no one should be cushion. trunk or vehicle interior can rise very allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat posi- quickly. Exposure of people to these tions if the head restraints are folded down. high temperatures for even a short If these positions are occupied, the head CAUTION restraints should be in the upright (fixed) period of time can cause heat-related position. To help avoid damage to the upholstery, injury or death. Small children are par- there should be no objects on the rear seat ticularly at risk. and the seat belt should not be buckled Folding down the rear seat backrests when the backrest is folded down.

The rear seat backrests are split and can be folded down together or separately

86 03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING • When one or more sections of the backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible. 03 • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Long loads should always be securely anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop. • Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading the vehicle. • Place the transmission in the Park (P) position to help prevent inadvertent movement of the gear selector. • On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk.

87 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING 2. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. 3. Open the driver's door. > A sound will be audible when the steer- With the optional speed-dependent power ing wheel lock engages. 03 steering the level of steering force can be Vehicles with keyless drive* adjusted, see page 146. 1. Switch off the engine (see page 111 for details). Unlocking/locking 2. Open the driver's door. Unlocking > A sound will be audible when the steer- G021138 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot ing wheel lock engages. Adjusting the steering wheel as far as possible. Lever for releasing/locking the steering 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. Keypads wheel > A sound will be audible when the lock Possible positions releases. The steering wheel can be adjusted for both Vehicles with keyless drive* height and reach: A remote key must be in the passenger compartment or trunk (but not inserted into the igni- 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the tion slot) steering wheel. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. > A sound will be audible when the steering wheel lock releases. 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to Locking push into place, press the steering wheel 1. Switch off the engine (see page 111 for Keypads in the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the details). Cruise control, see page 147. Adaptive lever. cruise control*, see page 149. Infotainment controls, see page 203.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Horn

Horn Press the steering wheel hub to sound the horn.

89 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Lighting panel High/low beam headlights High/low beam headlights Continuous high beams 1. Set the ignition to mode II. 2. With the light switch in position 0 or , pull the turn signal lever toward the 03 steering wheel to position 2 to toggle between high and low beams (this also applies on models equipped with the optional Active Bending Lights). > The symbol illuminates in the

G022854 instrument panel to indicate that the high beams are on. Overview, light switches Headlight switch and lever Thumb wheel for adjusting display and High beam flash Low beams instrument lighting When the engine is started, the low beams are Toggle between high and low beams Rear fog light activated automatically (daytime running lights) if the headlight control is in position 0 or Front fog lights Daytime running lights/high . beams/high beam flash Headlights/parking lights Daytime running lights can be deactivated in Parking lights the MY CAR menu system under Settings Instrument lighting Car settings Light settings Daytime Illumination of the display and instrument lights Low beams/high beams/high will vary, depending on ignition mode. running lights. beam flash The display lighting is automatically subdued However, please be aware that these lights may not be deactivated in Canada. in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the High beam flash thumb wheel. Move the lever toward the steering wheel to The intensity of the instrument lighting is position 1. The high beams come on until the adjusted with the thumb wheel. lever is released.

90 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

1 NOTE ABL is activated automatically when the Symbol Display Explana- engine is started. • The use of daytime running lights is tion mandatory in Canada. The function can be deactivated/reactivated in Headlamp The system the MY CAR menu system under My S80 • Continuous high beams cannot be acti- failure is not func- vated when the headlight switch is in Active Bending Lights or under Settings Service tioning position . High beam flash will Car settings Light settings Active required properly and 03 function in this position. Bending Lights. should be inspected/ See page 127 for a description of the menu repaired by Active Bending Lights (ABL)* system. a trained and qualified NOTE Volvo serv- This function is only active in twilight or dark ice techni- conditions, and only when the vehicle is in cian. motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed as shown in the table.

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right) When this function is activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration).

1 The factory default setting is on.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Parking lights Front fog lights* Rear fog light

03 G022907 G014402 G014403

Headlight control in position for parking lights Button for front fog lights Button for rear fog light The parking lights (the license plate lights also The front fog lights can be switched on The single rear fog light is located in the driver's come on) can be turned on even when the igni- together with high/low beams or the parking side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only tion is switched off. lights. However, the fog lights switch off and function in combination with the high/low remain off while the high beams are on. beam headlights or the optional front fog lights. Turn the headlight control to the center position (the license plate lighting comes on at the Press the button to switch the fog lights on/ Press the button to switch the rear fog light same time). off. The light in the button comes on when on/off. the fog lights are on. The lighting also comes on when the trunk is > The rear fog light indicator symbol opened in order to alert anyone traveling on the instrument panel and the behind your vehicle. NOTE light in the button come on when the Regulations regarding the use of the front rear fog light is switched on. fog lights may vary, depending on where you drive.

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE NOTE When turning Move the lever as far up or down as possi- The rear fog light is considerably brighter • Regulations regarding the use of the than the normal taillights and should be hazard warning flasher may vary, ble to start the turn signals. The turn signals will used only when conditions such as fog, rain, depending on where you live. be cancelled automatically by the movement of snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned other vehicles to less than 500 ft. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- to its initial position by hand. (150 meters). vated automatically if an airbag 03 deploys. NOTE Hazard warning flashers • This automatic flashing sequence can Turn signals be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button Turn signals The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic When changing lanes hazard. The driver can automatically flash the turn To activate the flashers, press the button signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever in the center dash. Press the button again up or down to the first position and releasing it. to turn off the flashers.

93 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Interior lighting, front Interior lighting, rear The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if: • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control • the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode 0. 03 The lighting switches off when: • the engine is started • the vehicle is locked from the outside. The lighting comes on and remains on for two

G021149 G021150 minutes if one of the doors is open. Light switches, front roof lighting Rear reading lights The passenger compartment lighting can be Drivers side front reading light, on/off The lights are switched on or off by pressing switched on and off manually within 30 minutes each respective button. after the vehicle has been unlocked. Passenger's side front reading light, on/off If the lighting is switched on manually and the Overhead courtesy lighting. Courtesy lights/door step lighting* vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch switch off automatically after one minute. The lighting in the front part of the passenger on/off automatically when one of the front compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) doors is opened/closed. Trunk lighting and (2) in the roof console. The trunk lighting comes on automatically Glove compartment lighting Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger when the trunk lid is opened. The glove compartment lighting switches on/ compartment lighting: off automatically when the lid is opened/ • Off: right side depressed, automatic light- closed. ing off. Overhead courtesy lighting • Neutral position: automatic lighting is on. The passenger compartment lighting is • On – left side depressed, passenger com- switched on and off automatically when button partment lighting on. (3) is in the neutral position.

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Home safe lighting The time interval for this lighting can be set by When you leave your vehicle at night, you can pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings make use of the home safe lighting function to Light settings Approach light illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. duration. See page 127 for a description of the menu system. 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot. 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible 03 towards the steering wheel and release it. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See page 127 for a description of the menu system.

Approach lighting Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 54). When the function has been activated, the parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and door step lighting come on.

2 Factory setting

95 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off (the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre- Move the lever to position 0 to switch quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the off the windshield wipers. windshield less frequently).

Single sweep NOTE Move the lever upward from position The wipers will make an extra sweep each 03 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke at a time for as long as the lever is held up. time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

Intermittent wiping When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol With the lever in this position, you can will illuminate in the instrument panel. set the wiper interval by twisting the thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed Activating and setting the sensitivity or downward to decrease the speed. When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle Windshield wipers and washers must be running or in ignition mode II and the Rain sensor* on/off Continuous wiping windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or The wipers operate at normal speed. in the single sweep position. Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button The wipers operate at high speed. CAUTION . The windshield wipers will make one sweep. Use ample washer fluid when washing • Windshield wiper service position the windshield. The windshield should Press the lever up for the wipers to make an be thoroughly wet when the wipers are The windshield wipers must be in the service extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active in operation. position before the wiper blades can be mode when the stalk is released back to posi- cleaned or replaced. See page 321 for addition 0. • Before using the wipers, ice and snow tional information. should be removed from the wind- Deactivating shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper Rain sensor* Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- blades are not frozen in place. The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper ton or press the lever down to another speed according to the amount of water on the wiper position. windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Heated washer nozzles* IR-reflecting windshield* when the key is removed from the ignition slot The washer nozzles are heated automatically or five minutes after the ignition has been in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid switched off. from freezing.

CAUTION High-pressure headlight washing* High-pressure headlight washing consumes a 03 The rain sensor should be deactivated when large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the washing the car in an automatic car wash, headlights are washed using two alternatives: etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car • Low/high beam headlights on. The head- wash and could be damaged. lights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- Windshield washing lights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period. Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is not applied • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Nor- Dimensions mal halogen headlights will not be washed. A 1.9 in. (47 mm) CAUTION B 3.4 in. (87 mm) Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thor- An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coa- oughly wet when the wipers are in operating can be applied to the windshield to help tion. protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the Washing function fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels, etc. Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. Electronic equipment such as garage door After the lever is released the wipers make sev- openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi- eral extra sweeps. ces should not be placed on sections of the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washers

windshield with the IR coating because this could affect their function and limit their range. For best performance, place the device on the section of the windshield without the IR coating (see the area marked in the illustration).

98 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Power windows Operating NOTE • Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way. • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front windows slightly. 03

Manual up/down Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Driver's door control panel Operating the power windows Auto up/down Move one of the controls up/down as far Manual up/down Switch for disengaging rear door power as possible and release it. window buttons Auto up/down. > The window will open or close com- Rear door window controls All power windows can be operated using the pletely. Front door window controls. control panel in the driver's door. The control Resetting panels in the other doors only operate the win- If the battery has been disconnected, the auto WARNING dow in the respective doors. open function must be reset so that it will work For the power windows to function, the ignition properly. • Always remove the ignition key when the vehicle is unattended. must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle 1. Gently raise the front section of the button has been running, the power windows can be • Never leave children unattended in the to close the window and hold it for one operated for several minutes after the remote second. vehicle. key has been removed from the ignition slot, or • Make sure that the windows are com- until a door has been opened. 2. Release the button briefly. pletely unobstructed before they are 3. Raise the front section of the button again operated. for one second.

99 03 Your driving environment

Power windows

Laminated glass* Side rear windows This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windshield, optional moonroof and other 03 windows have laminated glass.

Sun shades* Rear window

Hook and lock tab The sun shade is integrated into the panels on both rear doors. 1. Pull up the sun shade and hook it into the upper edge of the door frame. 2. Lock the sun shade in place by pulling lock tab upward. The window can be opened and closed, even if the sun shade is in use. Integrated rear sun shade Pull up the sun shade and attach its hooks to the ceiling clips. > The sun shade's spring-loading will pull it taut. When not in use, release the hooks and hold the sun shade while it retracts.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* To activate this function, select reverse gear The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt in narrow spaces: the mirror down. 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the The function can be activated/deactivated in same time. MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt 2. Release them after approximately one sec- 03 ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the right mirror. See page 127 for a description fully retracted position. of the menu system. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L The door mirror will reset to its normal position: and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- automatically stop in the fully extended posi- gaged and the car remains stopped. tion. Door mirror controls • immediately when reverse is disengaged Storing the position* and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds Adjusting The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror ory when the vehicle has been locked with the • immediately if you press the correspond- or the R button for the right door mirror. remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with ing L or R button again. The light in the button comes on. the same remote control the mirrors and the • when the engine is turned off. driver's seat adopt the stored positions when 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the • when the side mirrors are folded in. center. the driver's door is opened. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light The function can be activated/deactivated in NOTE MY CAR under Settings Car settings should no longer be on. Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. Car key memory Position of door mirrors WARNING and driver's seat in key. See page 127 for a description of the menu system. Automatically tilting the door mirrors Objects seen in the mirrors may appear fur- when parking ther away than they actually are. Tilting the door mirrors when parking* The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to The door mirrors can be tilted down to help help give the driver a better view along the give the driver a better view along the sides of sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. parking. When the transmission is no longer in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Your driving environment

Mirrors

reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to Home safe and approach lighting Settings Climate settings Automatic their original position. The light on the door mirrors comes on when rear defroster. See page 127 for a description This function can be activated/deactivated in approach lighting or home safe lighting is of the menu system. selected, see page 95. MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt Interior rearview mirror left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right Rear window and door mirror 03 Auto-dim function mirror. See page 127 for information about defrosters An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from the MY CAR menu system. following traffic and automatically reduces Automatic retraction when locking glare in the mirror. When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking. See page 127 for a description of the menu system. Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice by an external force must be electrically reset from the rear window and the door mirrors. to the neutral position for electric retracting/ Press the button once to start simultaneous extending to work. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The • Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- light in the button indicates that the function is tons. active. Switch the function off when then win- • Fold them out again with the L and R but- dows have cleared to help avoid battery drain. tons. The rear window is defogged/de-iced auto- The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. matically if the vehicle is started in an outside temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Auto- defrosting can be selected in MY CAR under

102 03 Your driving environment

Compass*

Operation netic zone. The character C is shown in the Selecting a magnetic zone mirror's display if calibration is necessary. 1 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely 2 out of traffic and away from steel structures 15 14 and high-tension electrical wires. 3

2. Start the vehicle. 13 03 4 NOTE 12 5 8 For best results from calibration, switch off 11 9 all electrical equipment in the vehicle (cli- 10 mate system, windshield wipers, audio sys- 6 7 G018632 G029737 tem, etc.) and make sure that all doors are Rearview mirror with compass. closed. Magnetic zones. The rearview mirror has an integrated display The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. that shows the compass direction in which the 3. Using a pen or similar object, press and The correct zone must be selected for the com- vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are hold the button on the rear side of mirror pass to work correctly. until C is shown again in the mirror(after shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE 1. Put the ignition in mode II. (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), approx. 6 seconds). 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). 4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the dis- hold the button on the rear side of mirror play when calibration is complete. The compass is displayed automatically when for at least 3 seconds. The number for the the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To Alternative calibration method: current area will be shown. switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no object and press in the button on the rear side 3. Press the button repeatedly until the num- more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disap- of the mirror. ber for the required geographic area pears from the display when calibration is (1 – 15) is shown. complete. Calibration 4. The display will revert to showing the com- The compass may need to be calibrated if, for pass direction after several seconds. example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof*

Introduction Sliding moonroof Manual closing The moonroof controls are located in the ceil- Push the switch forward to the first stop ing console near the rearview mirror. The (the position for manual closing) and hold moonroof can be opened vertically and hori- it until the moonroof has closed to the posi- zontally. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode tion of your choice, or has closed com- I or II for the moonroof to be operated. pletely. 03 Automatic closing CAUTION Push the switch as far forward as possible • Remove ice and snow before opening (the position for automatic closing) and the moonroof. release it to automatically close the moonroof. • Do not operate the moonroof if it is frozen closed. G021343 WARNING • Never place heavy objects on the Sliding moonroof, forward/rearward moonroof. Opening, automatic • During manual closing, if the moonroof is obstructed, immediately open it Opening, manual again. Closing, manual • Never open or close the moonroof if it is obstructed in any way. Closing, automatic • Never allow a child to operate the moonroof. Automatic opening Pull the switch as far back as possible (to • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. the position for automatic opening) and • Never extend any object or body part release it to automatically fully slide open though the open moonroof, even if the the moonroof. vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. Manual opening Pull the switch back to the first stop (the position for manual opening) and hold it until the moonroof has opened to the position of your choice.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Power moonroof*

Tilt position Wind blocker

03 G028899

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- that folds up when the moonroof is open. trol upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and hold it until the moonroof has closed completely.

Visor The moonroof features a sliding visor. The visor slides open automatically when the moonroof is opened, and must be closed manually.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

• If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition When programming a garage door switch to be turned on or to the second • (“accessories”) position for programming 03 opener, it is advised to park outside of and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec- the garage. ommended that a new battery be placed in • Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand-held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U.S. training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards (this includes radio-frequency signal. any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- door that cannot detect an object - sig- mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the vides a convenient way to replace up to three naling the door to stop and reverse - HomeLink button you wish to program hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters does not meet current U.S. federal while keeping the indicator light in view. used to activate devices such as gate opera- safety standards. For more information, 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, contact HomeLink at: chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- security systems, even home lighting. Addi- www.homelink.com. ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator tional HomeLink information can be found on light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- the Internet at www.homelink.com. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device ing light. Now you may release both the you are programming for use in other vehicles HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- as well as for future HomeLink programming. It tons. is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE found where the hanging antenna wire is cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” attached to the motor-head unit. step 2 with the following: Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- “smart” button. (The name and color of the button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- button may vary by manufacturer.) There every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly 03 tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold blinking light. Now you may release both for two seconds and release the pro- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and buttons. “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- time, and, depending on the brand of the ton up to two separate times to activate the plete. garage door opener (or other rolling code door. If the door does not activate, press equipped device), repeat this sequence a and hold the just-trained HomeLink button third time to complete the programming Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. process. To operate, simply press and release the pro- • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling grammed HomeLink button. Activation will stantly, programming is complete code equipped device. now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage and your device should activate when door opener, gate operator, security system, the HomeLink button is pressed and Gate Operator/Canadian Programming entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For released. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not event that there are still programming difficul- stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the ties or questions, contact HomeLink at: ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- signal during programming. Similar to this www.homelink.com. gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro- or “smart” button. This can usually be

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Erasing HomeLink Buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink To erase programming from the three Home- at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be This device complies with FCC rules part 15 erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation below), follow the step noted: is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink This device may not cause harmful interfer- 03 buttons until the indicator light begins to ence, and (2) This device must accept any flash-after 10 seconds. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for tion. longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode NOTE and can be programmed at any time beginning The transmitter has been tested and com- with “Programming” - step 1. plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Reprogramming a Single HomeLink the party responsible for compliance could Button void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- Link button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Start WARNING The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not • Never use more than one floor mat at a started, repeat the procedure. time on the driver's floor. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the NOTE accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of Keyless drive* 03 these pedals is not impeded. To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- drive feature, one of the remote keys must factured for your car. They must be be in the passenger compartment. Follow firmly secured in the clips on the floor so the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle. that they cannot slide and become trap- ped under the pedals on the driver's side. Ignition switch with remote key inserted ( see page 80 for more information on ignition modes) 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot WARNING as far as possible, with the metallic key blade pointing outward (not inserted into Before starting the engine: the slot)1. Fasten the seat belt. • 2. Depress the brake pedal2. • Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. 3. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function will Make sure the brake pedal can be • operate the starter motor until the engine depressed completely. Adjust the seat starts or until its overheating function stops if necessary. it.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING NOTE CAUTION • Always remove the remote key from the • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the auto- ignition slot when leaving the vehicle, noticeably higher than normal for a matic transmission may shift up at especially if there are children in the short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor- vehicle. components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem- 03 • Never open the driver's door while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. perature as quickly as possible, which perature. The steering lock could otherwise be enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately activated, making it impossible to steer help reduce the vehicle's impact on the after starting. Oil flow may not reach 3 the vehicle. On vehicles with the environment . some lubrication points fast enough to optional keyless drive, never remove prevent engine damage. the remote key from the vehicle while • The engine should be idling when you driving or during towing. move the gear selector. Never acceler- • Always place the gear selector in Park ate until after you feel the transmission and apply the parking brake before engage. Accelerating immediately after leaving the vehicle. Never leave the selecting a gear will cause harsh vehicle unattended with the engine run- engagement and premature transmis- ning. sion wear. • Always open garage doors fully before • Selecting P or N when idling at a stand- starting the engine inside a garage to still for prolonged periods of time will ensure adequate ventilation. The help prevent overheating of the auto- exhaust gases contain carbon monox- matic transmission fluid. ide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous.

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

110 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Switching off the engine To jump start your vehicle: WARNING With the engine running, press the START/ 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! STOP ENGINE button. mode 0, see page 80). Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- If the gear selector is not in the P position or if 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the sories contain lead and lead compounds, the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). chemicals known to the state of California press and hold it in until the engine switches to cause cancer and reproductive harm. 03 off. 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) Wash hands after handling. terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a "+" sign, located under a Jump starting folding cover. CAUTION 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the aux- Connect the jumper cables carefully to iliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and avoid short circuits with other components to the ground point in your vehicle's engine in the engine compartment. compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) (4). 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, then start the engine in the vehicle with dead battery. 6. After the engine has started, first remove

G021347 the negative (–) terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) termi- Connecting the jumper cables nal jumper cable (red). Follow these instructions to jump start your vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle.

111 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

WARNING • Do not connect the jumper cable to any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which 03 is flammable and explosive. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • Do not smoke near the battery. • Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury.

112 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Automatic transmission before the gear lever can be moved from the Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta- P position. tionary with the gear selector in position N. Always apply the parking brake when the vehi- Drive (D) cle is parked. Press the control to apply the D is the normal driving position. The car auto- brake, see page 119. matically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and 03 speed. The car must be at a standstill when shifting from position R to position D. Geartronic–manual shifting Geartronic allows you to manually shift among

G021351 your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic can be selected at any time. Shiftgate positions1 • To access the manual shifting position Depress the button on the front of the gear from Drive (D), move the gear selector to selector knob to move the gear selector the right (to the area marked M in the illus- between the R, N, D, and P positions. tration. The gear selector can be moved freely between • To return to the D position from the manual the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) CAUTION shifting position, move the gear selector to positions while driving. the left. The vehicle must be stationary when posi- While driving Park position (P) tion P is selected. • If you select the manual shifting position Select the P position when starting or parking. while driving, the gear that was being used Reverse ®) Shiftlock in the Drive position will also initially be The vehicle must be stationary when position When P has been selected, the transmission is selected in the manual shifting position. R is selected. mechanically blocked in this position. The • Move the gear selector forward (toward brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- Neutral position (N) "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward tion must be in at least mode II (see page 80) No gear is engaged and the engine can be (toward "–") to shift to a lower gear. started with the gear selector in this position.

1 The information display (see page 73) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

113 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the not switch to manual shifting mode until the selector forward again and release it to transmission will downshift one gear at a gear selector is moved forward or rearward select 3rd gear. time and will utilize the braking power of toward + or –. the engine. If the current speed is too high 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently for using a lower gear, the downshift will Sport mode can be selected any time. on the accelerator pedal. not occur until the speed has decreased Shiftlock override enough to allow the lower gear to be used. NOTE 03 • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- • When the transmission is in Sport mission will automatically shift down. mode, the transmission symbol in the Shiftlock – Neutral (N) main instrument panel will change from If the gear selector is in the N position and the D to S (see page 73). vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 sec- • Please be aware that using Sport mode onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- may result in a slight decrease in fuel ning) then the gear selector is locked. economy. Driving in D can help improve fuel economy. To be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in posi- Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces tion II, see page 80. Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when 2 Geartronic–Sport mode (S) starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so: If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example This transmission mode provides sportier shift- because of a dead battery, the gear selector ing characteristics and enables a more active 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the must be moved from the P position before the driving style by making it possible to drive at gear selector to the right from the D posi- vehicle can be moved3. higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The tion to the manual shifting position. The Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the engine also responds faster when the throttle text in the instrument panel display will storage compartment behind the center pedal is pressed. change from D to 1. console to expose the small opening for To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the 2. Press the gear selector forward and overriding the shiftlock system. gear selector to the right. The transmission will release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the

2 Certain models only 3 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 111.

114 03 Your driving environment

Transmission

Insert the key blade into the opening. Press NOTE the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down. Move the gear selector The message AWD disabled Service from the P position. For information on the required will be appear in the information display if an electrical fault should occur in key blade, see page 57. the AWD system. A warning light will also 4 illuminate in the instrument panel. If this All Wheel Drive – AWD occurs, have the system checked by a 03 trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electron- ically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction.

4 Standard on certain models.

115 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

Brake system Brake pad inspection WARNING The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- Use the jack intended for the vehicle sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- tion of the brake pads can be checked by rais- • when changing a tire. For any other job, lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is ing the vehicle (see page 298 for information use stands to support the vehicle. still possible to stop the vehicle with the other about using the jack and removing a wheel) brake circuit. and performing a visual inspection of the brake • The jack should be kept well-greased 03 pads. and clean, and should not be damaged. If the brake pedal must be depressed farther • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- than normal and requires greater foot pressure, slippery surface. the stopping distance will be longer. WARNING • No objects should be placed between A warning light in the instrument panel will light • If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, the the base of jack and the ground, or up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. wheel hub, brake components, etc., will between the jack and the attachment If this light comes on while driving or braking, be very hot. Allow time for these com- bar on the vehicle. stop immediately and check the brake fluid ponents to cool before carrying out the • The jack must correctly engage the jack level in the reservoir. inspection. attachment. • Apply the parking brake and put the • Never allow any part of your body to be NOTE gear selector in the Park (P) position. extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain • Block the wheels standing on the pressure on the pedal – do not pump the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or brakes. large stones. Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when WARNING the brakes are applied. If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the Adaptive brake lights reservoir or if a brake system message is The adaptive brake lights activate in the event shown in the information display: DO NOT of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti- DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained vated. This function causes an additional tail- and qualified Volvo service technician and light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to have the brake system inspected. help alert vehicles traveling behind. The adaptive brake lights activate if:

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

• The ABS system activates for more than brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several approximately a half second sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. times and a sound may be audible from the • In the event of sudden braking while the This will remove the water from the brakes. ABS control module, which is normal. vehicle is moving at speeds above approx- Check that brake application feels normal. This imately 6 mph (10 km/h) should also be done after washing or starting Cleaning the brake discs in very damp or cold weather. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake may result in delayed brake function. This delay 03 lights and additional taillights remain on for as Severe strain on the brake system is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. long as the brake pedal is depressed or until The brakes will be subject to severe strain Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet braking force on the vehicle is reduced. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or weather, prior to long-term parking, and after when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually Power brakes function only when the the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brak- slower, which means that the cooling of the engine is running ing gently for a short period while the vehicle is brakes is less efficient than when driving on The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure moving. level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, which is only created when the engine is run- shift into a lower gear and let the engine help ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the Emergency Brake Assistance with the braking. Do not forget that if you are engine switched off. EBA is designed to provide full brake effect towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak- If the power brakes are not working, consider- a greater than normal load. ing. The system is activated by the speed with ably higher pressure will be required on the which the brake pedal is depressed. brake pedal to compensate for the lack of Anti-lock braking system (ABS) power assistance. This can happen for exam- The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to When the EBA system is activated, the brake ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) pedal will go down and pressure in the brake switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The during severe braking conditions by limiting system immediately increases to the maximum brake pedal feels harder than usual. brake lockup. When the system "senses" level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- in order to utilize the system completely. EBA Water on brake discs and brake pads matically modulated in order to help prevent is automatically deactivated when the brake affects braking lockup that could lead to a skid. pedal is released. Driving in rain and slush or passing through an The system performs a brief self-diagnostic automatic car wash can cause water to collect test when the engine has been started and on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- delay in braking effect when the pedal is matic test may be performed when the vehicle depressed. To avoid such a delay when the first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph

117 03 Your driving environment

Brakes

NOTE Symbols in the instrument panel • When the EBA system is activated, the Symbol Specification brake pedal will go down and pressure Steady glow – Check the brake in the brake system immediately increa- fluid level. If the level is low, fill ses to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the brake with brake fluid and check for 03 pedal in order to utilize the system com- the cause of the brake fluid pletely. There will be no braking effect if loss. the pedal is released. EBA is automati- Steady glow for two seconds cally deactivated when the brake pedal when the engine is started – is released. There was a fault in the brake • When the vehicle has been parked for system's ABS function when some time, the brake pedal may sink the engine was last running. more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is WARNING released. If and come on at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected.

118 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake NOTE An electric parking brake has the same func- In an emergency the parking brake can tion as a manual parking brake. • be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will be NOTE interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is released. • A faint sound from the parking brake's 03 electric motor can be heard when the • An audible signal will sound during this parking brake is being applied. This procedure if the vehicle is moving at sound can also be heard during the speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). automatic function check of the parking brake. Parking on a hill • The brake pedal will move slightly when • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front the electric parking brake is applied or Parking brake control wheels so that they point away from the released. curb. 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the Low battery voltage 2. Push the control. front wheels so that they point toward the If the battery voltage is too low, the parking > The symbol in the instrument curb. brake cannot be applied or released. Connect panel flashes while the parking bake is The parking brake should also be applied. an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too being applied, and glows steadily when low, see page 111. the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

119 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Releasing the electric parking brake NOTE Symbols • For safety reasons, the parking brake is Symbol Specification only released automatically if the engine Read the message in the infor- is running and the driver is wearing a seat mation display belt. 03 • The electric parking brake will be A flashing symbol indicates that released immediately when the acceler- the parking brake is being ator pedal is pressed and the gear selec- applied. If the symbol flashes in tor is in position D or R. any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. 2. Fasten the seat belt. Read the message on the information display. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R Parking brake control and press the accelerator pedal. The park- Messages Manual release ing brake will release when the vehicle 1. Fasten the seat belt. begins to move. 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot (or Heavy load uphill press the START/STOP ENGINE button A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. incline. To help avoid this: 4. Pull the parking brake control. 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever Automatic release pushed in with the left hand while shifting 1. Start the engine. into Drive with the right. 2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull away, release the parking brake lever only after the vehicle begins to move. Park brake not fully released – A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact

120 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake not applied – A fault is pre- venting the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact 03 an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake Service required – A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains.

WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill.

121 Volvo Sensus...... 124 Menus and messages...... 125 The MY CAR menus...... 127 Climate system...... 133 Trip computer...... 142 Stability system...... 144 Active chassis system–Four C*...... 146 Cruise control...... 147 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*...... 149 Distance Alert* ...... 159 City Safety™ ...... 162 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... 167 Driver Alert System* ...... 175 Park assist*...... 181 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ...... 185 Blind Spot Information System*...... 189 Passenger compartment convenience...... 193

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Volvo Sensus

Introduction menus, the climate and infotainment systems as well as other options such as the park assist camera(s), etc. Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center instrument panel to display information and selections are made using this panel’s controls and buttons. Certain features can also be controlled using the steering wheel keypad. Press MY CAR to present all of the available settings related to driving and/or controlling 04 the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the clock, lock settings, etc. Center console control panel Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM* Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: to change a source and to activated systems see the separate VNS manual for operating or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Blue- instructions. tooth, navigation* and the park assist camera *. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*): see the infotainment system overview begin- See the respective sections in this manual for ning on page 202. more detailed information about your vehicle's various features and functions. Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see page 127. Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 185. Climate system: see page 133.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a number of functions such as the individualized settings that can be made in the MY CAR

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main instrument panel Average Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among the messages. Instantaneous Average speed NOTE Current speed in mph (Canadian models If a warning message appears while you are only) using the trip computer, the message must Engine oil level* be read and confirmed by pressing READ before the previous activity can be Calibrate tire pressure resumed.

Messages Message Description 04 G022908 Stop safely Stop and switch off Information display and menu controls the engine. Serious READ – access to the list of messages and risk of damage. message confirmation. Contact an author- Thumbwheel – browse among menus and ized Volvo work- options in the list of functions. shop. RESET – reset the active function. Used in Stopping the Stop and switch off certain cases to select/activate a function, engine the engine. Serious see the explanation under each respective risk of damage. function. Contact an author- G028940 The menus shown on the information displays ized Volvo work- in the instrument panel are controlled with the shop. When a warning, information or indicator sym- left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition bol comes on, a corresponding message Service urgent Have the vehicle mode. Press READ to erase a message and appears on the information display. An error checked by an return to the menus. message is stored in a memory list until the authorized Volvo Menu overview fault is rectified. workshop immedi- Driving distance on current fuel reserve ately.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Description Message Description Service required Have the vehicle Maintenance over- If the service inter- checked by an due vals are not fol- authorized Volvo lowed, the warranty workshop as soon does not cover any as possible. damaged parts. Contact an author- See manual Read the owner's ized Volvo workshop manual. for service.

04 Book time for Time to book service Temporarily OFF A function has been maintenance at an authorized temporarily Volvo retailer. switched off and is Time for regular Time for regular reset automatically while driving or after maintenance service at an authorized Volvo work- starting again. shop. The timing is Power save mode The audio system is determined by the switched off to save number of miles current. Charge the driven, number of battery. months since the last service, engine running time.

126 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Introduction Operation • Press EXIT briefly to go back one step at a The menu system provides access to time in the current menu. Center console controls menus for operating many of the vehi- • Press and hold EXIT to go to the main MY cle's functions, such as setting the CAR menu. clock, door mirrors, locks, etc. • From the main MY CAR menu, press and Navigating in the menus is done using the but- hold EXIT to go to the infotainment sys- tons on the center console control panel or with tem's main view. See page 204 for addi- the right-side steering wheel keypad. tional information. Some of the features mentioned in this section Steering wheel keypad are optional. 04

Center console controls for menu navigation Press MY CAR to access the My Car menus. Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted selection or to store a certain function in the system's memory. Turn to navigate up/down among menu The keypad varies according to the vehicle's selections. equipment EXIT Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down among menu selections. Press the thumb EXIT functions wheel to make a selection or store a func- EXIT can be used to go back in the menu tion in the system's memory. structure or to cancel the most recent selection. The results of pressing EXIT vary, EXIT. depending on where you are in the menu structure.

127 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Paths EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to My S80 The current menu level is displayed at the return to the main menu. upper right of the center console display. Menu The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in paths are displayed as follows, for example: the center console can be used in the same way. Settings Car settings Lock settings Doors unlock Driver door, then all MY CAR The following is an example of how to set a When the MY CAR symbol has been selected, function in the menu system: the following menu alternatives are displayed. 04 1. Press the MY CAR button on the center console control panel.

2. Navigate to a menu, for example MY CAR My S80 Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and press it to open a submenu. The display shows all of the vehicle's driver support systems, which can be activated/ 3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as deactivated here. Car settings. 4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the thumb wheel to open a new submenu. 5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the thumb wheel to open a submenu with alter- • My S80 natives that can be selected. • Support systems 6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the • Settings desired choice and press the thumb wheel to put an X in the box. 7. Finish by exiting the menu system either one step at a time with short presses on

128 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Driver support systems Doors unlock See page 53 for more information. All doors Approach light duration Driver door, then all Off Keyless entry 30 sec All doors 60 sec Any door 90 sec Doors on same side See page 54 for more information. Both front doors Home safe light duration 04 Audible confirmation 30 sec See page 53 and 60 for more information. MY CAR Support systems 60 sec Reduced Guard (MY CAR > Support systems) 90 sec Activate once The screen shows the current status (settings) See page 95 for more information. Ask when exiting for the vehicle's driver support systems. See page 68 for more information. Triple indicator Menu settings Side mirror settings See page 93 for more information. The following pages list the main menus/sub- Fold mirrors Daytime running lights menus and possible selections. Tilt left mirror See page 90 for more information. Car key memory Tilt right mirror See pages 84 and 53 for more information. Active bending lights See page 101 for more information. Lock settings See page 91 for more information. Light settings Automatic door locking Tire pressure system Door lock confirmation light Warns if tire pressure is too low Unlock confirmation light

129 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Calibrate tire pressure Lane Departure Warning Screensaver See page 301 for more information. Lane Departure Warning The contents of the screen are replaced by another image if this selection is marked. The Steering wheel force On at start-up contents of the screen will be displayed again High Increased sensitivity if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see Medium See page 178 for more information. page 127. Low DSTC Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver off. See page 146 for more information. See page 144 for more information. Language Reset car settings City Safety 04 Select the language for menu texts. This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to See page 162 for more information. the original factory settings. Show help text BLIS This displays help texts for the current menu. See page 189 for more information. MY CAR Settings Driver support Distance and fuel units systems Distance Alert MPG (UK) See page 159 for more information. Collision Warning MPG (US) Driver Alert Collision Warning km/l See page 175 for more information. Warning distance l/100km Long MY CAR Settings System options See page 142 for more information about the trip computer. Normal Set/change time Temperature unit Short See page 78 for more information. Celsius Warning sound Time format Fahrenheit See page 169 for more information. 12 h Select the temperature scale to be displayed by the climate control unit. 24 h

130 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

Volume levels Navigation repeat instruction Voice training Voice output volume Navigation go to address User 1 Front park assist volume General commands User 2 Rear park assist volume Help Voice training enables the system to become familiar with the driver's voice and pronuncia- Phone ringing volume Cancel tion. A list of phrases is presented on the Reset system options Voice tutorial screen for the driver to read aloud. When the This feature returns the "System options" The menu alternatives under Phone system has registered the driver's pronuncia- menu to the original factory settings. commands show examples of the voice com- tion, no additional phrases will be displayed. mands available when a cell phone is con- After completed voice training, select User 1 04 or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the sys- MY CAR Settings Voice settingsA. nected to the Bluetooth hands-free system. See page 237 for more detailed information. tem to the current user. A Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System Voice output volume and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone The menu alternatives under Navigation commands show examples of the voice com- • A volume control will be displayed. To set Voice tutorial mands available for the optional Volvo the volume level: Select this menu alternative and press OK for Navigation System. Refer to the navigation 1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel system's manual for detailed information. spoken information about how the system 2. Test the setting by pressing OK works. Voice user setting 3. Store the setting and leave the menu by Voice command list Default setting pressing EXIT. Phone commands User 1 Voice POI list Phone User 2 Edit list Phone call contact Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if The navigation system has a large number of points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs Phone dial number more than one person uses voice commands regularly. Default setting resets the factory can be stored in this list. Navigation commands settings. The menu alternative Voice POI list is only Navigation displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the

131 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

The MY CAR menus

optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the See page 207 for more information about this navigation system's manual for detailed infor- feature. mation. MY CAR Settings Information MY CAR Settings Audio settings Number of keys See page 200 for more information about the See page 52 for more information. infotainment system. VIN number MY CAR Settings Climate settings See page 343 for more information. 04 DivX® VOD code Automatic blower adjustment See page 222 for more information. Normal Bluetooth software version in car High See page 228 for more information. Low Map and software version Recirculation timer Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System Automatic rear defroster manual for more information. Interior air quality system Reset climate settings This feature returns the "Climate settings" menu to the original factory settings. For more information about the climate system, see page 133.

MY CAR Settings Favorites (FAV)

132 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Introduction NOTE mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting. Air conditioning The sunlight sensor monitors which side of The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate the car that is most exposed to sunlight. Vents in the parcel shelf Control (ECC). The climate control system This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the pas- vents, even if the temperatures set for both NOTE senger compartment. sides of the passenger compartment are the The air vents at the rear of the parcel shelf same. should never be obstructed. NOTE • The air conditioning can be switched • The temperature sensor for the passenger Temporary shut-off of the air compartment is located below the climate off, but to ensure the best possible cli- conditioning 04 control panel. mate comfort in the passenger com- The air conditioning is momentarily disen- partment and to prevent the windows • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor gaged during full-throttle acceleration or when from misting, it should always be on. is located on the door mirror. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a • In warm weather, a small amount of • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- temporary increase in cabin temperature. water may accumulate under the car rior rearview mirror. when it has been parked. This water is Ice and snow condensation from the A/C system and NOTE Always keep the air intake grille at the base of is normal. the windshield free of snow. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. Climate system maintenance Sensor location Special tools and equipment are required to The sunlight sensor is located on the top • maintain and carry out repairs on the climate side of the dashboard. Side windows and moonroof To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- system. Work of this type should only be done mally, the side windows, and the optional by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- moonroof should be closed. nician.

Fog on the inside of the windows Refrigerant The defroster function should be used to Volvo cares about the environment. The air remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- conditioning system in your car contains a dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air condi-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

tioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of NOTE Air distribution R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter Passenger compartment filter replacement intervals. Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to Materials used in the cabin your Warranty and Service Records Informa- The materials used in the cabin have been tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified developed to help minimize the amount of dust Volvo service technician for these intervals. and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All The filter should be replaced more often when floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The Use car cleaning products recommended by 04 filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should Volvo. See also the information beginning on

always be replaced with a new one. page 335. G021366

NOTE Menu settings The incoming air is distributed from a number The default settings for four of the climate sys- of different vents in the passenger compart- There are different types of cabin air filters. tem's functions can be changed in the menu Ensure that the correct type is installed. ment. system. Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) • Blower speed in automatic mode. mode. A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles • Recirculation timer for passenger com- If desired, air distribution can be controlled in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels partment air. manually, see page 140. of odors and contaminants entering the vehi- • Automatic rear window defrosting. cle. The air quality sensor detects increased • The optional Interior Air Quality System levels of contaminants in the outside air. When (IAQS). the air quality sensor detects contaminated The functions can also be returned to factory outside air, the air intake closes and the air settings in the menu system. inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The See page 127 for a description of the menu filter also cleans recirculated passenger com- system. partment air.

134 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

04 G021368

Open Open Closed Closed Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. dows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat.

135 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Electronic climate control, ECC

Temperature control, driver's side Heated rear window and door mirrors, see Climate system controls page 102 Heated driver's seat1* Ventilated front seats* Heated front passenger's seat* The ventilation system consists of fans in the Defroster (maximum effect) Temperature control, passenger's side seats and backrests that draw air through the Blower seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases Recirculation as the air in the passenger compartment Manual air distribution—floor AUTO becomes cooler. Manual air distribution—dashboard air The ventilation is controlled by the ECC sys- A/C on/off vents tem, which takes into account the seat tem- Manual air distribution—defroster Ventilated driver's seat * perature, sunlight in the passenger compartment, and the ambient temperature. Ventilated passenger's seat*

1 The location of the button varies, depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with the optional ventilated front seats

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

The ventilation can be used at the same time Heated front seats* Heated rear seats* as seat heating. The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running. There are three comfort levels that produce different cooling and dehu- midifying effects: • Level three: press the button once for maximum output – three indicator lights come on. • Level two: press the button twice for a lower output – two indicator lights come 04 on. Level one: press the button three times for The current seat temperature is shown in the cen- • Heat control for the outboard seating positions the lowest output – one indicator light ter console display is done in the same way as for the front seats. comes on. Press the button once for the • Press the button a fourth time to switch off highest heat level – three indi- Blower control the function – the indicator light will go out. cator lights come on. Turn the control clockwise to Press the button twice for a increase or counterclockwise lower heat level – two indica- to decrease the blower tor lights come on. speed. If AUTO is selected, blower speed will be regula- Press the button three times for the lowest heat ted automatically and this will level – one indicator light comes on. override manual adjustment. Press the button four times to switch off the heat – no indicator lights come on. NOTE Seat heating will automatically switch off when If the blower is turned off completely, the air the engine is switched off. conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal or High.

NOTE Selecting the lowest blower speed may increases the risk of fog forming on the windows.

04 Temperature control Air distribution is shown in the center console dis- The temperatures on the play driver and passenger sides Manual air distribution—defroster can be set separately. When Auto Manual air distribution—dashboard air the vehicle is started, the The function automatically vents most recent setting is regulates cooling, heating, resumed. Manual air distribution—floor blower speed, recirculation, and air distribution to main- The figure consists of three buttons. When a NOTE button is pressed, the corresponding figure will tain the chosen temperature. appear in the display with an arrow indicating If you select one or more man- Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by which manual air flow has been selected (see ual functions, the other func- selecting a higher/lower temperature than the following illustration). See also the air dis- tions continue to be controlled automatically. the actual temperature required. tribution chart on page 140. The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

138 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

A/C – ON/OFF The climate system will return to its previous NOTE When the indicator light in the settings when the defroster function is button is on, the air condition- switched off. When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated. ing is controlled automatically. This cools/heats and Recirculation/air quality system dehumidifies the incoming air. Recirculation Interior Air Quality System–IAQS* When the indicator light in the This function can be used to This system consists of a multifilter and an air button is off, the air condition- shut out exhaust fumes, quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases ing is disengaged. Other functions are still con- smoke, etc., from the passen- and particles from the incoming air, thereby trolled automatically. When maximum ger compartment. The air in reducing the amounts of odors and contami- defroster is selected, the air conditioning sys- the passenger compartment nants entering the vehicle. The air quality sen- 04 tem is set for maximum blower speed and is then recirculated, i.e., no air sor detects increased levels of contaminants in dehumidification. from outside the car is taken the outside air. When the air quality sensor into the car when this function is activated. The detects contaminated outside air, the air intake Defroster indicator light in the button will illuminate when closes and the air inside the passenger com- This function defrosts/de-ices recirculation is selected. partment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air the windshield and front side enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recir- windows. The indicator light If the air in the car recirculates for too long, culated passenger compartment air. When the there is a risk of condensation forming on the in the defroster button lights AUTO button is depressed the air quality sen- insides of the windows, especially in winter. when the function is active. sor is always engaged. Timer Activate or deactivate this function in Climate The timer function minimizes the risk of fog- • Blower speed increases automatically and settings Interior air quality system. the air conditioning will switch on (if not ging, or stale air when the recirculation function already on and if the passenger compart- is selected by automatically switching off the ment blower is not turned off) to dehumid- function after a certain length of time, depend- ify the air in the passenger compartment. ing on the ambient temperature. Activate/ Air conditioning can be switched off by deactivate the function under Climate pressing the AC button. settings Recirculation timer. See page • Recirculation will not function while defrost 127 for a description of the menu system. is engaged.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

NOTE • The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment. • Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid fogging. • If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor. Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear win- 04 dows.

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and windows. To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard ice the front side win- Some air flows from the conditions and good de- air vents. The air is not dows and windshield dashboard air vents. fogging in cold or humid recirculated. Air condition- quickly. weather. ing is always engaged.

Air to windshield and side In cold or humid Air to floor and from dash- In sunny weather with windows. Some air flows weather (blower board air vents. cool outside tempera- from the air dashboard speed should be tures. vents. moderate to high).

140 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate system

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Airflow to windows and To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air flows to To warm or cool the feet. from dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry the dashboard air vents and weather. windows.

Airflow to the head and To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, from To cool the feet or pro- chest from the dashboard cooling in warm dashboard air vents and to vide warmer air to the air vents. weather. the floor. upper body in cold 04 weather or hot, dry weather.

141 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

Introduction Functions updated every few seconds. When the vehicle is stationary, "----" appears on the display. NOTE Average fuel consumption If a warning message appears while you are The average fuel consumption since the last using the trip computer, this message must reset. Reset using RESET. be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a Driving distance on current fuel reserve message by pressing READ. This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the To change the unit of measure specified for tank. The calculation is based on average fuel 04 distance and speed, contact an authorized consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) Volvo workshop. G022909 of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading was taken. When the Information display and controls Average speed message ---- miles to empty tank appears in READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/ The system calculates the average speed from the display, refuel as soon as possible. erase a message) the last resetting. Reset using RESET. Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip Current speed in mph (Canadian models NOTE computer menus) only) The actual distance that can be driven on RESET–resets certain functions This function provides the driver with an instan- the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be taneous conversion of the car's current speed influenced by a change in driving style. To scroll through trip computer information, from km/h to mph. move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue See also page 258 for information on driving turning to return to the starting point. Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) economically. This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed Resetting from mph to km/h. 1. Select --- mph average speed or --.- mpg average. Current fuel consumption 2. (Instantaneous) Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If Current fuel consumption is calculated every RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three second. The information on the display is

142 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer seconds, Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously.

143 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

Introduction one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows Under certain circumstances, such as when The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control a tendency to skid or slide laterally. driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to system (DSTC) consists of a number of func- This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tions designed help reduce wheel spin, coun- cannot be switched off. teract skidding, and to generally help improve tractive force. directional stability. Spin control (SC) If the driver releases pressure on the acceler- The spin control function is designed to help ator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help sta- CAUTION prevent the drive wheels from spinning while bilize the vehicle. the vehicle is accelerating. A pulsating sound will be audible when the To switch to Sport mode: system is actively operating and is normal. 04 Operation 1. Press the My Car button in the center console control panel and select My S80 Traction control (TC) Sport mode DSTC in the menu. This function is designed to help reduce wheel The stability system is always activated and spin by transferring power from a drive wheel cannot be switched off. 2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the by pressing EXIT. opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). However, the driver can select Sport mode, > This puts DSTC in Sport mode. which offers more active driving characteris- TC is most active at low speeds. tics. In this mode, the engine management sys- Sport mode remains active until the driver This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and tem monitors movement of the accelerator switches it off in the menu or until the engine is cannot be switched off. pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode allowing more lateral movement of the rear when the engine is restarted. Active Yaw Control (AYC) wheels before DSTC is activated. This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking

144 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Stability system

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel Symbol Message Description DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly. • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected. 04 "Message" Read the message in the information display

and

Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

- Sport mode has been activated.

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

145 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Active chassis system–Four C*

Active chassis (Four C) Operation NOTE Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con- This steering force level menu function can- trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the cha- not be accessed when the vehicle is in racteristics of the shock absorbers so that the motion. car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. 04 This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected. Chassis settings Sport Use the buttons in the center console to In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is change setting. The setting in use when the reduced during cornering and steering engine is switched off is activated the next time response is more immediate. The transmission the engine is started. shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indi- Speed-dependent steering force* cate that Sport mode has been selected. Steering force increases with the speed of the Advanced vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in and steering response is very direct. Gear shift- order to facilitate parking, etc. ing is done at high rpm in each gear for Steering force can be changed under MY CAR dynamic and active driving. Car settings Steering wheel force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, see page 127.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

Operation > The symbol illuminates and the text 2. Press or for approximately a half (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- second and release the button to increase trol is in standby mode. or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). NOTE NOTE • Putting cruise control in standby mode does not set a cruising speed. • A temporary increase in speed by • When cruise control is in standby mode, pressing the accelerator pedal, for less the driver's seat belt must be fastened than 1 minute (e.g. when passing before a cruising speed can be set. another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle will 04 automatically return to the previously Setting a speed set speed when the accelerator pedal is Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Use the or buttons set the vehicle's cur- released. Standby mode rent speed. The set speed is shown in the dis- • If one of the cruise control buttons is play. kept depressed for more than approx. Resume set speed 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. Deactivating NOTE The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control. Activate/set speed Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate Automatic deactivation standby mode) Adjusting the set speed Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs: Engaging the cruise control function After a speed has been set, it can be increased Before a speed can be set, the cruise control or decreased by using the or buttons. • If the speed drops below approximately system must be engaged (put in standby 20 mph (30 km/h). 1. Press and hold down or until the mode). • When the brake pedal is depressed. vehicle reaches the desired speed. • If the gear selector is moved to position N. Press the symbol (1). > This will become the set speed when the button is released.

147 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. WARNING If the vehicle's speed is increased by using • Cruise control should not be used in heavy the accelerator pedal for more than traffic or when driving on wet or slippery 1 minute. roads. Cruise control may not maintain set The currently set speed will be saved in the speed on steep downgrades. system's memory.

Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is 04 shown in brackets in the information display. Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed.

WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed.

Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged by pressing or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.

148 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Introduction WARNING Function Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover system designed to assist the driver by main- • all driving situations and traffic, weather taining a set speed or a set time interval to the and road conditions. The "Function" vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use section provides information about lim- on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as itations that the driver must be aware of on highways and other main roads. before using this feature. When the driver has set the desired speed and • This system is designed to be a supple- the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC mentary driving aid. It is not, however, functions as follows: intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is 04 • If there are no other vehicles in the lane responsible for maintaining a safe dis- ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the tance and speed and must intervene if set speed. Adaptive Cruise Control does not main- Function overview1 • If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower tain a suitable speed or suitable dis- Warning light, braking by driver required moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- tance to the vehicle ahead. tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to help Controls in steering wheel Maintenance of ACC components may maintain the set time interval to the vehicle • only be performed by a trained and ahead. When there are no longer slower Radar sensor in front grille qualified Volvo technician. moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: accelerate to resume the set speed. A cruise control system to maintain a set If ACC is switched off completely or in standby • speed mode and your vehicle comes too close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will be • A system to maintain a set distance to the warned by the Distance Alert system (see vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a page 159). time interval. For example, you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The actual distance required to maintain a 2-second interval will vary according the speed of the vehicles.

1 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the mode or is switched off completely, the always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brakes will not be modulated automatically. brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. The driver must assume full control over the another vehicle. vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly reg- to people or animals, or small vehicles ulate speed. However, the driver must apply Warning light—driver braking required such as bicycles and motorcycles. It the brakes in situations that require immediate Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force also does not react to slow moving, braking. This applies when there are great dif- that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the 04 parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- ferences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations tionary objects. vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. requiring more brake force than ACC can pro- • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in vide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, demanding driving conditions such as WARNING an audible signal from the Collision Warning city driving or other heavy traffic situa- system will sound and warning light will illumi- Due to limitations in the radar sensor, brak- nate (see page 168) in the windshield to alert tions, in slippery conditions, when there ing may occur unexpectedly or not at all, is a great deal of water or slush on the see page 154. the driver to react. road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on high- NOTE way on- or off-ramps. Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the wind- lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehi- disengages (goes into standby mode) and will cle's speed is regulated by accelerating and shield difficult to see. no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will braking. The brakes may emit a sound when then have to maintain a safe distance to the they are being modulated by the adaptive vehicle ahead. cruise control system. This is normal.

2 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 153 for more information.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Operation Putting ACC in standby mode Before ACC can be used to regulate speed Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehi- and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must cles detected by the radar sensor, see page 154. In some cases there may be no first be put in standby mode. warning or the warning may be delayed. The To do so: driver should always apply the brakes when necessary. Press . The symbol appears in the display and Steep inclines and/or heavy loads parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level standby mode. roads. The system may have difficulty main- 04 taining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead NOTE on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situa- Controls and display The driver's door must be closed and the tions, the driver should always be prepared to Resume previous settings, increase speed driver's seat belt must be fastened before apply the brakes if necessary. (each additional press increases speed by ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h). door is opened, ACC will return to standby Standby mode on/off mode. Set time interval Setting a speed Put in active mode and set a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use Set speed (parentheses indicate standby the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's mode) current speed. This puts the system in active mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is Time interval while it is being set shown in the display. Time interval after it has been set

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When the symbol on the Setting a time interval left side of the display The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be changes to , the radar sen- increased by pressing and decreased by sor has detected another pressing . The current time interval is shown vehicle ahead. The distance briefly in the display following adjustment. to a vehicle ahead is only Different time intervals can be regulated when this symbol ( ) is illumi- selected and are shown in the The number of bars indicating the selected nated. display as 1–5 horizontal bars. time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward. Changing the set speed The greater the number of bars, the longer the time inter- A smaller version of the symbol is then shown After a speed has been set, it can be increased 04 val. One bar represents a time to the right in the display. The same symbol is or decreased by using the or buttons. interval of approximately also displayed when Distance Alert is in active Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the 1 second; 5 bars is approximately mode, see page 159 . vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph 2.5 seconds. At low speeds, when the distance Standby mode (temporary deactivation) (approximately 8 km/h). to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases Press to temporarily deactivate cruise con- When the system is in active mode, the but- the time interval slightly. In order to follow the trol (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for ton has the same function as , but results in vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in example 55 mph, is then shown in parenthe- a smaller increase in speed. certain situations. ses. The previously set speed and time interval are NOTE WARNING resumed by pressing . If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control • Only use a time interval that is suitable buttons is pressed for more than • in current traffic conditions. WARNING approximately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be • A short time interval gives the driver lim- There may be a significant increase in speed switched off and restarted to reset ACC. ited reaction time if an unexpected sit- after the button has been pressed. uation occurs in traffic. • In some situations Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be put in active mode. When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s Cruise control Unavailable is shown speed increases by approximately 1 mph in the display, see page 157. (1 km/h) each additional time is pressed.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Standby mode due to action by the driver An automatic switch to standby mode may be vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in caused if: complete stop. standby mode: • the wheels lose traction During short stops (less than approximately 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle • when the brakes are applied • brake temperature is high will begin moving again automatically as soon if the driver's seat belt is taken off • • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for as the vehicle ahead begins to move. • If the driver's door is opened example, wet snow or rain. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle • if the gear selector is moved to N Queue Assist* ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automati- • if the accelerator pedal is depressed for The following functions are linked to your vehi- cally go into standby mode. more than 1 minute. cle's automatic transmission and comprise the The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in Queue Assist feature. 04 one of the following ways: NOTE Please note that the lowest speed that can be • By pressing If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can a short time, such as when passing another maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist con- (4 km/h) is reactivated when the pedal is released. sists of the following features: Your vehicle will then resume following the Enhanced speed interval vehicle ahead at the set time interval. Automatic standby mode Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval Adaptive cruise control is linked to other sys- to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, NOTE tems such as the stability and traction control including a complete stop. system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning ACC can remain active and keep your vehi- In order to activate ACC at speeds below cle at a standstill for up to 2 minutes. After properly, adaptive cruise control is automati- 2 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake cally deactivated and will go into standby 18 mph (30 km/h): will be engaged and ACC will go into mode. • The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- standby mode. In the event of automatic deactivation, an audi- sonable distance (not farther away than To reactivate ACC, the driver must release ble signal will sound and the message Cruise approx. 100 ft/30 meters) the parking brake (see page 120) and press control Cancelled is shown in the display. • The lowest speed that can be selected is . The driver must then intervene and adapt the 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and help maintain the set time interval to the regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Automatic standby mode when ACC • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph • The driver opens the door or takes off changes target vehicles (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the his/her seat belt target object is a stationary vehicle or some • DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 144) other type of object such as e.g., a speed bump. • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than 2 minutes • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so • The engine has been switched off that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to • The brakes have overheated follow. Turning ACC off completely No automatic braking when at a • From standby mode, press once. 04 standstill If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply • From active mode, press twice. a stationary vehicle ahead the brakes and go into standby mode while the The set speed and time interval are then The following only applies at speeds below vehicle is not moving. This means that the cleared from the system's memory and cannot approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): driver will have to apply the brakes. be resumed by pressing . If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that This happens if: the radar sensor has detected) from a moving • The driver presses the brake pedal The radar sensor and its limitations vehicle to a stationary one, the system will The parking brake is activated In addition to being used by ACC, the radar apply the brakes in your vehicle. • • The gear selected is moved to P,N or R sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see page 159) and Collision Warning with Full WARNING • The driver presses the button to put Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC ACC in standby mode page 167). This sensor is designed to detect will not react to a stationary vehicle and The parking brake is applied cars or larger vehicles driving in the same apply the brakes but will instead accelerate automatically direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. to the previously set speed. The driver must In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle. brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at a standstill. ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if: This happens if:

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

WARNING Situations where ACC may not function optimally Accessories or other objects, such as extra headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille. WARNING Modification of the radar sensor could make • The radar sensor has a limited field of its use illegal. vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles detect other vehicles at all. ahead is impeded: • If ACC is not functioning properly, cruise control will also be disabled. • if the radar sensor is obstructed and can- 04 not detect other vehicles, for example in heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean.

• if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed. Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

In curves, the radar sensor may detect the WARNING Fault tracing and actions wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target If the message Radar blocked See manual is Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- vehicle. • displayed, this means that the radar signals sion avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the from the sensor have been obstructed and that WARNING brakes if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover another vehicle. This, in turn, means that the functions of the all driving situations and traffic, weather • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning and road conditions. The "Function" to people or animals, or small vehicles System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian section provides information about lim- such as bicycles and motorcycles. It Detection will not function. itations that the driver must be aware of also does not react to slow moving, The table lists possible causes for this mes- 04 before using this feature. parked or approaching vehicles, or sta- sage being displayed, and suitable actions. • This system is designed to be a supple- tionary objects. mentary driving aid. It is not, however, • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in intended to replace the driver's atten- demanding driving conditions such as tion and judgement. The driver is city driving or other heavy traffic situa- responsible for maintaining a safe dis- tions, in slippery conditions, when there tance and speed and must intervene if is a great deal of water or slush on the Adaptive Cruise Control does not main- road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor tain a suitable speed or suitable dis- visibility, on winding roads or on high- tance to the vehicle ahead. way on- or off-ramps. • Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician.

Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Cause Action Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description 04 - Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected.

- Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance.

- Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

- Turn on DSTC to enable ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to Cruise normal operating mode, see page 144 for more information. ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See page 144 for more information.

- Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Symbol Message Description - Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 154 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

04 Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Press Brake To hold + an The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

– Below 20 mph Only follow- This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle ing ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

Introduction NOTE Depending on the optional equipment Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- selected, there may not be room for a Distance Distance Alert only monitors distance to the trol and is a function that provides information Alert button in the center console. In this case, vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control the function is controlled through the menu about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. is in standby mode or off. system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings Distance Alert is active at speeds above Car settings Distance alert On/Off. approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval WARNING information is only given for a vehicle that is Setting a time interval driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direc- Distance Alert only indicates the distance to tion. No information is provided for vehicles the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a speed of your vehicle. standstill. 04 Operation

Controls and display Time interval: Increase/decrease Time interval: On, while it is being set 1 Amber warning light . Time interval: On, after it has been set An amber warning light in the windshield glows Press the button in the center instrument panel Press to increase the interval or to steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one to switch this function on or off. The indicator decrease it. ahead than the set time interval. light in the button illuminates when the function is on.

1 The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

Five different time intervals WARNING WARNING can be selected and are shown in the display as 1–5 Only use a time interval that is suitable in • Bad weather or winding roads may horizontal bars. The greater current traffic conditions. affect the radar sensor’s capacity to the number of bars, the longer detect vehicles ahead. The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a the time interval. One bar rep- Limitations • resents approximately motorcycle, may also make it difficult to 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor detect. This may result in the warning approximately 2.5 seconds. used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- light illuminating at a shorter distance lision Warning system. See page 154 for more than the one that has been set, or that The number of bars indicating information on the radar sensor’s limitations. the light will not come on at all. 04 the selected time interval are shown while the setting is NOTE being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light version of the symbol is then contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may shown to the right in the dis- make the visual warning signal in the wind- play. The same symbol is displayed when shield difficult to see. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.

NOTE • The higher your vehicle’s speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval. • The set time interval is also used by Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 151.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Time interval while it is being set.

- Time interval after it has been set.

Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 154 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

04 Collision warn. Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning required properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

Introduction means that the system cannot help the driver WARNING City Safety™1 is a support system designed to in all situations. • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to help the driver avoid low speed collisions when City Safety™ should not be used to alter the the driver. It can never replace the driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic. way in which the driver operates the vehicle. driver’s attention to traffic conditions or City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s The driver should never rely solely on this sys- his/her responsibility for operating the speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). tem to safely stop the vehicle. vehicle in a safe manner. This means that City Safety™ will not react if Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not • City Safety™ does not function in all your vehicle approaches another vehicle at be aware of City Safety™ except when the driving situations or in all traffic, weather very low speed, for example, when parking. system intervenes when a low-speed collision or road conditions. The function is active at speeds up to approx- is imminent. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles 04 imately 18 mph (30 km/h) and assists the driver If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional traveling in the same direction as your by applying the brakes automatically, thereby Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and vehicle and does not react to small vehi- avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems cles, bicycles or motorcycles or to people or animals. collision. interact. For more information about the Colli- City Safety™ is not activated when your City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late sion Warning with Auto-brake system, see • vehicle is backing up. as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- page 167. tion. • City Safety™ functions at speeds up to 18 mph (30 km/h). This system can help City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a prevent a collision if the difference in low-speed collision is imminent. However, the speed between your vehicle and the system will not intervene in situations where vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoi- greater, a collision cannot be avoided ded. This is done in order to always give the but the speed at which the collision driver’s actions highest priority. occurs can be reduced. The driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes for full brak- City Safety™ activates in situations where the ing effect. driver has not applied the brakes in time, which • Never wait for City Safety™ to intervene in a potential collision situation. The

1 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

162 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

driver is always responsible for main- The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. taining a safe distance to the vehicle a collision or reduce its effect. may obscure the hood and windshield. ahead. When the function activates and applies the When the engine is running, City Safety™ can brakes, a message will appear in the informa- be switched off as follows: tion display to indicate that the system is/has Function Press My Car in the center console control been active. panel and go to Settings Car settings NOTE Driver support systems City Safety. Select Off. • When City Safety™ applies the brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will reactivate when the engine is restarted. 04 • In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must WARNING apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at The laser sensor emits light when the igni- a standstill. tion is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™ has been switched off.

2 Location of the laser sensor in the windshield Using City Safety™ To switch City Safety™ on again: City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you NOTE • Follow the same procedure as for switch- using a laser sensor mounted in the upper sec- ing City Safety™ off but select ON. tion of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, The City Safety™ function is activated auto- City Safety™ will automatically apply the matically each time the engine has been brakes, which may feel like hard braking. switched off and restarted. If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than approxi- On and Off mately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone In certain situations, it may be desirable to cannot prevent a collision from taking place. switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving

2 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model

163 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

Limitations NOTE Cause Action The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed Keep the windshield in front of the laser to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles • The area of the Clean the wind- sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and dark- windshield in front of shield or remove the page 163. ness. the sensor is dirty or ice/snow. • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than covered by ice or However, there are certain limitations and the 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- snow. laser sensor’s function may be reduced by, for sor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow. example, heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense • Do not mount or in any way attach any- The laser sensor's Remove the fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa- thing on the windshield that could field of view is obstruction. tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield may obstruct the laser sensor. obstructed. 04 also interfere with the sensor’s function. Objects such as warning flags hanging from CAUTION long objects on the roof or accessories such as Troubleshooting If a crack, scratch or stone chip should auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in occur in the section of the windshield in of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may the information display, this indicates that the front the laser sensor and covers an area of also impede the sensor’s function. City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in approximately 1/50 x 1/10 in. (0.5 x 3 mm) some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa- or larger, contact a trained and qualified you, which means that the system is not func- Volvo service technician to repair or replace ses on slippery road surfaces, which may tioning. the windshield (see the illustration showing reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- the location of the sensor on page 163). sion. In situations like this, the DSTC system However, this message will not be displayed in Failing to do so may result in reduced City (see page 144) will help provide the best pos- all situations in which the sensor is obstructed. Safety™ functionality. sible braking capacity and stability. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the To help prevent reduced functionality, area of the windshield in front of the sensor is City Safety™ emits infrared light and measures please also observe the following: always kept clean. the way in which the light is reflected. There- • If the windshield is replaced, use the fore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective sur- The following table shows some of the situa- same type or a windshield approved by faces may not be detected. Normally, the tions that can cause the message to be dis- Volvo. license plate and taillight reflectors give the played and suggested actions. • When replacing windshield wipers, use rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflec- the same type or ones approved by tive surfaces to be detected. Volvo.

164 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

The laser sensor Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ WARNING

Maximum average output 45 mW Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: Pulse length 33 ns • It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- cal) ing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may NOTE only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The function of aftermarket laser detectors 04 may be affected by City Safety's laser sen- • Do not remove the laser sensor (includ- sor. ing removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to The upper decal describes the laser beam's laser class 3B according to standard classification and contains the following text: WARNING IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes. Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly The laser sensor emits light when the igni- with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class tion is in mode II or higher, even if City • The laser sensor’s connector must be 1M laser product. Safety™ has been switched off. disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield. The lower decal describes the laser beam's • The laser sensor must be mounted in physical data and contains the text: place on the windshield before con- IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with necting the sensor’s connector. FDA performance standards for laser products • Do not view the laser sensor (which except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice emits spreading, invisible laser beams) No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 with optical instruments from a distance The laser beam's physical data is listed in the of less than 4 inches (100 mm). following table:

165 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

Symbols and messages in the display instrument panel may illuminate and its asso- When City Safety™ automatically applies the ciated message will be displayed. brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the READ button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Meaning/action required Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically. 04

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. blocked • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 164.

City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning. • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

166 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Introduction The system should not be used in such a way WARNING Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and that the driver changes his/her way of operat- Collision Warning does not work in all Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the • driving, traffic, weather and road condi- driver if there is a risk of a collision with a system, the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably. tions. It does not react to vehicles not pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a stand- traveling in the same direction as your still or one that is moving in the same direction The Collision Warning and City Safety™ sys- vehicle. as your vehicle. tems supplement each other. See page 162 for • Collision Warning does not react to ani- Collision Warning consists of the following detailed information about City Safety™. mals. three functions: Warnings are only provided when the WARNING • Collision Warning warns the driver of a risk of collision is high. The "Function" • 04 potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed to section provides information about lim- function 100% correctly in all situations. For • Brake Support helps the driver brake effi- itations that the driver must be aware of that reason, never test the Auto-brake sys- before using Collision Warning. ciently in a critical situation. tem by driving toward a person or object. Collision Warning will not provide a • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- This could result in serious injury or death. • cally if a collision with a pedestrian or warning or brake the vehicle for pedes- another vehicle cannot be avoided and the trians at speeds above 50 mph driver does not apply the brakes in time or (80 km/h). steer around the person/vehicle. Auto- brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven- tion.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

WARNING Function Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase after • Collision Warning will not provide a the collision warning has been given, Brake warning or brake the vehicle for pedes- Support is activated. Brake Support prepares trians in darkness or in tunnels, even if the brake system to react quickly, and the there is street lighting in the area. brakes are applied slightly. This may be expe- • The auto-brake function can help pre- rienced as a light tug. vent a collision or reduce the speed at impact but the driver should always If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking apply the brakes for the best possible effect will be provided. Brake Support also braking effect, even if auto-brake is increases brake force if the system determines 04 actively applying the brakes. that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal. • Never wait for a collision warning. This system is designed to be a supplemen- Function overview Auto-brake tary driving aid. It is not, however, If a collision is imminent and the driver has not intended to replace the driver's atten- Visual warning signal, collision risk applied the brakes or begun to steer around the tion and judgement. The driver is Radar sensor vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function responsible for maintaining a safe dis- is activated without the driver pressing the tance and speed, even when the colli- Camera sion warning system is in use. brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision • Maintenance of the Collision Warning Collision Warning occurs or limited brake force is applied if this system's components must only be The radar sensor and the camera work is sufficient to avoid the collision. performed by a trained and qualified together to detect a pedestrian, stationary Volvo technician. vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk NOTE of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the The auto-brake and brake support functions driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light are always on and cannot be turned off. and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h).

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Operation Setting a warning distance NOTE Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the This setting determines the distance at which When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, center console control panel and using the the visual and audible warnings are triggered. • the warning light and signal will be used Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY menus displayed. by that function, even if the warnings CAR on the center console control panel and On and off provided by Collision Warning have going to Settings Car settings Driver been deactivated by the driver. To switch Collision Warning on or off, press MY support systems Collision Warning CAR on the center console control panel and • In situations where traffic is moving at Warning distance. go to Settings Car settings Driver considerably different speeds, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- support systems Collision Warning. If The warning distance determines the level of sensitivity used by the system. The warning ings may be considered to be late, even Collision Warning is on, the system will perform distance Long provides an earlier warning. if the setting Long has been selected. 04 a self-test each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning light. See page Begin by using Long and if the system gives 128 for more information about the menu sys- too many warnings, try changing to Normal. Checking settings tem. The current Collision Warning settings can be WARNING checked by pressing MY CAR on the center When the engine is switched on, the Collision console control panel and going to Settings • The setting Short should only be used Warning setting that was being used when it Car settings Driver support systems was switched off will be the default setting. in situations where traffic is light and moving at low speeds. Collision Warning. Activating/deactivating warning signals • Collision Warning alerts the driver to the The collision warning system’s visual signals risk of a collision but this function can- Limitations are activated automatically when the engine is not reduce the driver’s reaction time. Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con- started if the collision warning system is • For Collision Warning to be as effective trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is switched on. as possible, it is recommended that Dis- not looking straight ahead may make the visual The audible warning signal can be activated/ tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center page 159. For this reason, always activate the audible console control panel and going to Settings warning signal. Car settings Driver support systems Slippery driving conditions increase braking Warning sound if risk of collision. distance, which can reduce the system's

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

capacity to avoid a collision. In these condi- WARNING NOTE tions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the best possible braking effect while helping to • In certain situations, the system cannot If warnings are given too frequently, the maintain stability. provide warnings or warnings may be warning distance can be reduced (see delayed if traffic conditions or other page 169). This causes the system to pro- external factors make it impossible for vide later warnings, which decreases the NOTE the radar sensor or camera to detect a total number of warnings provided. The visual warning signal may be temporar- pedestrian or a vehicle ahead. ily disengaged in the event of high passen- • Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING ger compartment temperature due to strong distance to the vehicle ahead is short, sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible or if movements of the steering wheel/ • The system is not activated at speeds warning signal will be used, even if it has under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There- 04 been deactivated in the menu system. brake pedal are great, such as during active driving. fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you approach a vehicle ahead at very low • The sensor system has a limited range speed, such as when parking. for pedestrians and provides warnings and braking effect most effectively at • The driver's actions always have high- speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For sta- est priority and override the Collision tionary or slow-moving vehicles, the Warning system. This means that the system functions best if your vehicle’s system will not intervene in situations speed is below approximately 45 mph where the driver is actively steering, (70 km/h). braking or pressing the accelerator pedal, even if a collision is imminent. • Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles may not be provided in dark • When Auto-brake has prevented a col- conditions or in poor visibility. lision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been The Collision Warning system uses the same braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For vehicle's speed will be reduced to the more information on the radar sensor and its same speed as that vehicle's. limitations, see page 154.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

The camera’s limitations WARNING Pedestrians The camera is used by Collision Warning with Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see • The camera has the same limitations as page 175), and Lane Departure Warning (see the human eye. In other words, its “vision is impaired” by adverse weather page 178). conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may NOTE reduce the function of systems that • To help protect the camera in very hot depend on the camera or cause these conditions, it may be temporarily systems to temporarily stop function- switched off for approximately 15 ing. minutes after the engine has been • Never place any objects, decals, etc., 04 started. on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s • Keep the section of the windshield in The system cannot identify all pedestrians front of the camera clean and free of ice, function, and could cause one or more snow, or condensation. of the systems that utilize the camera to The Collision Warning system can only identify stop functioning. and detect a pedestrian who is standing • Strong sunlight, reflections from the upright. This person can be standing still, walk- road surface, ice or snow covering the ing or running. road, a dirty road surface, or unclear This means that the system has to be able to lane marker lines may drastically reduce identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the camera’s capacity to detect the side the upper and lower parts of the body and a of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehi- person's pattern of movement when walking or cle. running. If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. The following conditions apply: • In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

body and the person must be at least Fault tracing and actions 32 in. (80 cm) tall. If the message Windscreen Sensors • The system cannot detect a pedestrian blocked is displayed, this means that the cam- carrying a large object. era is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians, • The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian vehicles or road marker lines in front of the at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for vehicle. the human eye. This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with • The camera's function is deactivated and Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection, will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Con- in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in trol will not have full functionality. 04 the area. The table lists possible causes for this mes- WARNING sage being displayed, and suitable actions. • Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. • The system cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Cause Action The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register display. visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this 04 surface cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Collis'n warning OFF Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavaila- Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate ble the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button.

Auto braking was acti- Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the READ button. vated

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by blocked snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 171 for more information on the camera’s limitations.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See man- Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for ual example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 154 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Introduction Driver Alert Control (DAC)– DAC is designed to help detect a slowly chang- The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction ing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be driver who may be becoming fatigued or who used on main roads and is not meant for use in is inadvertently leaving the lane. city traffic.

The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- WARNING ent functions that can be switched on together or separately. • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at Driver Alert Control (DAC) • regular intervals to help remain alert. Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect page 178 • the driver’s behavior. In situations of 04 When one or both of the functions has been this type, no warning will be provided. switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- Therefore, it is important to take breaks vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of at regular intervals, regardless of 40 mph (65 km/h). This function is intended to alert the driver if whether or not DAC has given a warning. The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). driver is distracted or fatigued. Limitations Both functions use a camera that is dependent In certain situations, DAC may provide warn- on the road/lane being clearly marked by pain- NOTE ings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not ted lines on each side. The camera has certain limitations, see page 154. become erratic. WARNING • if the driver is testing the LDW function The Driver Alert System does not function in A camera monitors the painted lines marking • in strong crosswinds all situations and is designed to be a sup- the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and • on grooved road surfaces. plementary aid. It is not, however, intended compares the direction of the road with the to replace the driver’s attention and judge- driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The ment. driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Operating DAC Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver WARNING Certain settings can be made from the menu Alert is displayed. The second line shows An alert should be taken seriously since system controlled from the center instrument the alternatives Off, Driver Alert Standby • it is sometimes difficult for a driver to panel. <40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/ realize that he/she is fatigued. h), Unavailable or [-----], i.e., the number The current system status can be checked on of bars. • In the event of a warning or if the driver the trip computer’s display by using the but- feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible tons on the left steering wheel lever. READ button. Confirms and erases a mes- in a safe place and rest. sage in the display.

Activating DAC 04 Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel and go to Car settings Driver Alert and select On. See page 127 for more information on the menu system. The function is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). The display will show level markings of 1–5 bars, where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving. If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is displayed. The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the same.

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h)

- Driver Alert Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low 04 number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area blocked of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 171 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– Operation and function If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph introduction (60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode and Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 mph (65 km/h) will be displayed. If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed. If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s left or right side marker lines, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal. 04 No warning signal will be given in the following situations: LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the • The turn signal is being used This function is designed to help reduce the button on the center console. A light in the but- • The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1 ton illuminates when the function is on. risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle 1 leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off • The throttle pedal is pressed quickly The trip computer display shows Lane Depart the road or into the opposite lane. LDW con- • If the steering wheel is moved quickly1 Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn sists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible standby mode. body to sway signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line See page 171 for information on the camera’s or the road’s center dividing line. When LDW is in standby mode, the function is limitations. activated automatically after the camera has monitored the road’s side marker lines and the vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). WARNING Lane Depart Warn Available will be dis- The driver will only be warned once for each played. time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels.

1 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Settings There are two alternatives: apply. When this setting is being used, the system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be On at start-up: This selection switches LDW one side of the vehicle to change status to made in the menu system by pressing My on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, Lane Depart Warn Available. Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver the system will be in the mode that it was in support systems Lane Departure when the engine was switched off. Warning. Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations

04 Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description Lane departure warning ON/Lane The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby (65 km/h). <65 km/h)

- Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System*

Symbol Message Description Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 171 for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Introduction Function Activating/deactivating The park assist system is designed to assist The system is activated automatically when the you when driving into parking spaces, garages, vehicle is started. etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front Press the Park assist button on the center bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the dis- console to temporarily deactivate the sys- tance to a vehicle or an object that may be tem(s). close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An > The indicator light in the button will go audible signal and symbols in the audio sys- out when the system has been deacti- tem’s display indicate the distance to the vated. object. Park assist will be automatically reactivated the 04 WARNING next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will Park Assist is an information system, NOT a illuminate). safety system. This system is designed to Park assist button be a supplementary aid when parking the The system is activated automatically when the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- NOTE replace the driver's attention and judge- ton in the center console illuminates when the Park assist is disengaged automatically ment. system is on. when the parking brake is applied. • The front park assist system is active from the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the vehicle is backing up. • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Signals from the park assist system Audible signal Rear park assist The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers.

04 NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low- G021423 ered/raised with the infotainment volume View in the display (warning for objects front left/ control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is right rear) CAR menu system, see page 128. approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal Visual indicator comes from the rear speakers. If the volume of another source from the audio The audio system’s display gives an overview The system must be deactivated when towing system is high, this will be automatically low- of the vehicle’s position in relation to a a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted ered. detected object. carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park The marked sectors in the display indicate that assist system's sensors. one or more of the sensors has detected an object. The closer the car symbol comes to a NOTE sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object. Rear park assist is deactivated automati- If the infotainment system is switched off, the cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine park assist system will not be able to provide a trailer wiring is used. visual indicator. An audible signal will still be provided.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

Front park assist Faults in the system Cleaning the sensors If the information symbol illuminates and Park assist syst Service required is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning sig- 04

G021424 nals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound fre- The distance monitored in front of the vehicle quencies as the system. This may include Location of the front sensors is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, nal comes from the audio system's front motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does speakers. not indicate a fault in the system. It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE Front park assist is deactivated when the parking brake is applied and or when the gear selector is in the P position. G021425 Location of the rear sensors. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist*

with water and a suitable car washing detergent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Introduction Function Ambient lighting conditions The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the The camera automatically monitors the ambi- center console to show the area behind the car ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle and while you are backing up. constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the image PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light image to indicate the direction that the vehicle is increased in dark conditions or in bad will take as it moves rearward, which helps weather, which may affect image quality. simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. If the image on the screen seems too dark, brightness can be increased with the thumb WARNING wheel on the lighting panel. 04 • PAC is designed to be a supplementary NOTE aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and In order to function properly, the camera driver’s attention and judgment. if a person or animal should suddenly appear lens should always be kept clean. This is from the side. particularly important in bad weather. Keep • The camera has blind spots where it the lens free of dirt, ice or snow. cannot detect objects or people behind PAC is mounted on the rear of the trunk lid, the vehicle. near the opening handle. • Pay particular attention to people or ani- The camera has built-in electronics that help mals that are close to the vehicle. reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image shown on the screen is as natural as possible. This may cause some objects on the screen to “lean,” which is normal.

WARNING Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

Using PAC With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch, Guiding lines a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward Activation the trailer will be projected. This feature can be activated in the MY CAR menu, see page 128. The guiding lines for the wheels (see the following section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same time. If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed) image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press 04 EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view. Deactivation Move the gear selector from R to another posi- The lines on the screen are projected as if they tion. There is a slight delay in the PAC system, were a path on the ground behind the vehicle which means that the view from behind the PAC is activated when the gear selector is and are affected by the way in which the steer- vehicle will remain on the screen for approxi- moved to R if the system is selected in the MY ing wheel is turned. This enables the driver to mately 15 seconds after the gear selector has CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she been moved from the R position or until the button in the center console. See page 127 for turns the steering wheel while backing up. a description of the menu system. vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use, mode that it was in before R was selected and NOTE PAC will automatically override the navigation will, for example, display navigation system When backing up with a trailer, the guiding system to show the camera's image on the information. lines show the path that the vehicle will screen instead of navigation information, for as take, not the trailer. long as reverse gear is selected. NOTE Zoom If any button on the center console control The camera can be useful when attaching a panel is pressed, the camera image will dis- trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer appear from the display. Pressing CAM will hitch (and press this button again to return to return the camera image to the display. the normal camera view).

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

WARNING The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of The markers change color (from yellow to approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to Keep in mind that the image on the screen bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost the object. only shows the area behind the vehicle. The limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle , Marker (color) Distance to the vehicle when turning while backing up. even when the it turns. object The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m) Marker lines lines show where the wheels will roll and can extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m) Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m) behind the bumper if there are no objects in the way. Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) 04

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist Settings Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view is displayed and make the desired settings. Parking camera settings • Mark Park Assist lines to display the side- lines while backing up. • Mark Distance information to display the intersecting lines while backing up. The PAC system's lines Activating the system Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter) Mark Automatic to activate PAC each zone behind the vehicle • time reverse gear is selected. Marker line for the clear back-up zone Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance • Mark Off to turn off PAC completely. "Wheel tracks" If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Summary The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft Assist system, the distance to an object will be • The camera is activated when the gear (30 centimeters) of the rear bumper. indicated more exactly and colored markers in selector is moved to R (this can be the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has changed in the MY CAR menu) and the detected the object.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)*

image is shown on the center console dis- R. This setting can be changed in the in MY play. CAR menu. • When backing up, two solid lines are pro- • If there are two cameras installed on the jected on the screen to show the path that vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to lines are affected by movements of the be active), press CAM repeatedly or use steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate the center console controls. If the front outer dimension are shown by two dashed camera is on, it overrides the optional park lines. assist system's visual indicator but there • The graphic lines will not be displayed will still be an audible signal. when backing up with a trailer that is con- 04 nected to the vehicle's electrical system. Limitations • Objects on the ground that are closer than Even if a fairly small section of the screen image 1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by appears to be obstructed, this may mean that the camera. a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hid- • The camera is active for approx. den and objects there may not be detected 5 seconds after the gear selector is moved until they are very near the vehicle. to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE • The optional Park Assist sensors and the Bicycle carriers or other accessories moun- parking camera work together and infor- ted on the trunk may obstruct the camera's mation from the sensors is shown graphi- field of view. cally on the display. • The graphic lines shown on the screen Keep in mind when the vehicle backs up can be disabled Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and in the settings menu. • snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to • Manual zoom can be selected in the MY avoid scratching the lens. CAR menu. • Clean the lens regularly with warm water • The system can be switched off by press- and a suitable car washing detergent. ing CAM. By default, the system is activated when the gear selector is moved to

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

Introduction WARNING NOTE • BLIS is an information system, NOT a The door panel indicator light illuminates on warning or safety system. the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is • BLIS does not eliminate the need for passed on both sides at the same time, both you to visually confirm the conditions lights will illuminate. around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the driver if a fault should occur with the system. As the driver, you have full responsibility • For example, if one or both of the system's for changing lanes in a safe manner. cameras are obscured, a message (see the 04

G021426 table on page 191) will appear in the informa- The system is based on digital camera tech- tion display in the instrument panel. If this BLIS camera nology. The cameras are located beneath the occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, side-view mirrors. the system can be temporarily switched off (for Indicator light When one (or both) of the cameras have instructions, see page 191). BLIS symbol detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. information system that indicates the presence (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see of another vehicle moving in the same direction the illustration, the indicator light in the door as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind panel illuminates. The light will glow continu- area." ously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area. CAUTION The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi- vehicle in the blind area must have its head- cles in the blind area, this does not indicate When you pass another vehicle: lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system. The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. faster than that vehicle. Service required will be displayed. When you are passed by another vehicle: WARNING The following are several examples of situa- The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph 04 mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi- (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system. standing still. WARNING • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. tation as the human eye. In other words, • BLIS does not function when your vehi- their "vision is impaired" by adverse cle is backing up. weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, intense light directly into the If you are towing a wide trailer, this may • camera, dense fog, etc. prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. Limitations In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) How BLIS functions in daylight and Light reflected from a wet road surface may illuminate even when there are no other darkness vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

CAUTION switched off, and a text message is displayed. Clean the lenses carefully to avoid • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing scratching. • the button. The indicator light in the button • The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the READ button (see tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 125) to erase the message. Depending on the vehicle's optional equip- Switching BLIS on and off ment, there may not be space for the BLIS but- The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, ton in the center console. In this case, BLIS can smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on be switched on and off in the menu system by a highway 04 pressing MY CAR and going to Settings Car settings BLIS. See page 128 for a description of the menu system.

BLIS system messages Text in the dis- System status play Blind spot syst. BLIS not functioning Service required properly. Contact an Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low authorized Volvo on the horizon BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- service technician. Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses tion is switched on. The indicator lights will Blind spot syst. BLIS camera In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. camera blocked obscured. Clean the lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped • The system can be switched off by press- lenses. clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in Blind-spot info BLIS system on the button goes out when the system is system ON

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Blind Spot Information System*

Text in the dis- System status play Blind-spot info BLIS system off system OFF

Blind spot syst. The BLIS cameras' Reduced function function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer 04 between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Storage spaces

04 G024158

193 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input Jacket holder Rear seat cup holders 04 Storage pocket G021436 Jacket holder Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under The jacket hanger is located on the inboard The owner's manual and maps can be kept armrest. side of the front passenger's seat head here. There are also holders for pens and fuel restraint. It is only intended for hanging light Includes cup holder for driver and passen- cards. The glove compartment can be locked garments. ger, 12 V socket and small storage com- manually with the key blade, see page 64. partment.

194 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 80. The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W). The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from 04

G021438 G021439 your Volvo retailer. Vanity mirror with lighting 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console WARNING The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.

12-volt socket in the trunk* G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and

coolers. For the socket to supply current, the G021442

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Passenger compartment convenience

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket.

NOTE The 12-volt socket in the trunk provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.

196 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

197 Introduction...... 200 Getting started ...... 202 General infotainment functions ...... 207 Radio...... 210 Media player...... 219 AUX/USB sockets...... 223 Bluetooth media ...... 226 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...... 229 Cell phone voice control...... 237 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ...... 241 Remote control*...... 250 Infotainment system menus ...... 252

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT 05 Infotainment

Introduction

General information • AUX and USB sockets Audyssey MultEQ3 The infotainment system in your vehicle is • Bluetooth hands-free/streaming available in two versions: • 12 speakers High Performance Multimedia • 5x130W amplifier 7" color TFT display • Dolby Pro Logic • Voice control1 • Thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad • AM/FM/HD radio2 • Sirius satellite radio* The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used to optimize sound quality to help ensure a • CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats) world-class listening experience. • AUX and USB sockets Using the infotainment system 05 • Bluetooth hands-free/streaming If the infotainment system is on when the igni- • 8 speakers Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes stereo tion is switched off, it will come on automati- • 4x40W amplifier sound's two channels to the left/right and front/ cally the next time the ignition is put in mode I rear speakers. or higher and continue using the same source Premium Sound Multimedia (FM1, etc.) that was in use when the ignition • 7" color TFT display Dolby Pro Logic II and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing was switched off (the driver's door must also 1 • Voice control Corporation. The Dolby Pro Logic II System is be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless • Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- manufactured under license from Dolby drive). pad Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The infotainment system can be operated with- • AM/FM/HD radio2 out a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at • Sirius satellite radio* a time by pressing the On/Off button. • CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats)

1 Only available on models equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System. 2 U.S. models only 3 Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia.

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Introduction

While the engine is being started, the infotainment system will be temporarily interrupted and will resume when the engine has started.

NOTE To help avoid excessive battery drain, remove the remote key from the ignition slot if the infotainment system is used while the engine is switched off.

201 05 Infotainment

Getting started

Infotainment system overview Operating the system Infotainment mode buttons

Sockets for external audio sources (AUX Short press: switch the system ON. Press Press a button to select a mode RADIO: use to select AM, FM1, FM2, 05 and USB) and hold: switch the system OFF. 1 1 Steering wheel keypad Infotainment system mode buttons SAT1* , SAT2* (RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL). Press a button MEDIA: use to select DISC, AUX, USB, Center console control panel to access the desired mode and press the iPod or Bluetooth*. same button again to access the mode's 7" display TEL: Bluetooth® hands-free cell phone menus. Release the button and wait sev- operation Rear seat control panel with headphone eral seconds to automatically accept your socket* selection. You can also navigate in the MY CAR – See page 127. A/V-AUX socket* menus by turning TUNE to make a selection and pressing OK/MENU to confirm your selection. Turn TUNE to navigate among the menu alternatives in the display (FM1, DISC, etc.), or to quickly scroll among tracks, folders or radio stations.

1 Sirius Satellite radio

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Getting started

Basic infotainment functions TUNE: Turn in either direction to manually Views in the display tune a radio station or navigate among the menu alternatives shown on the display. General information The infotainment system displays information OK/MENU: Press to confirm a selection or in four different views. The highest (most gen- access the menus for the currently eral) level is called the main view and is com- selected infotainment system mode (you mon to all system modes (RADIO, MEDIA, can also choose to wait several seconds to TEL). Each mode has three different basic automatically accept your selection). views: EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, interrupt the current function, reject an incom- • Normal view: the default view for that particular mode ing phone call or erase any characters entered in the display. From the highest • Quick scroll view: the view displayed when level in the current menu, press and hold to TUNE is turned, which allows you to e.g., Controls in the center console for basic infotain- go to the infotainment system's main menu change tracks on a CD, change radio sta- ment functions view (see page 204). tions, etc. SOUND: press this button to access the 05 INFO: Press this button to display addi- • Menu view: a view for navigating and mak- menu for adjusting bass, treble, etc. See tional information about a function, song, ing selections in the mode's menu system. page 208 for additional information. etc. See page 207 for more information. The views in the different modes vary depend- VOL: Turn to raise or lower the volume FAV: This button can be used to store a ing on the mode selected, the vehicle's equip- level. shortcut to a commonly used function in ment, current settings, etc. Short press: switch the system ON. AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the sec- Press and hold: switch the system OFF. A tion "FAV—storing a shortcut" on page short press when the infotainment system 207 for information on using this button. is on will mute/unmute the infotainment system sound. Number key pad (used to e.g., select a preset radio station, enter letter/numbers when using a Bluetooth cell phone, etc.

203 05 Infotainment

Getting started

Main view the display (2) (for example, FM1) and press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice. Press and hold EXIT to go back.

NAV: Navigation system*

RADIO: Radio

MEDIA: Media (DISC, USB, etc.) Example of RADIO mode's normal view Example of RADIO mode's main view Modes (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA etc.), see the TEL: Bluetooth hands-free 05 following table. Source menu, e.g., (FM1, DISC, etc.). MY CAR: Driving-related settings Press and hold EXIT on the steering wheel keypad to display the main view (see the illustration). This offers a quick way of changing CAM: Park assist camera* modes (RADIO, MEDIA etc.) directly from the steering wheel keypad without taking your hands off the steering wheel. This can also be done using the mode buttons on the center Example of Bluetooth hands-free mode's menu console control panel. view • Select a mode (1) by turning the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad. Press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice. • After selecting a mode, turn the thumb wheel to one of the mode's alternatives in

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Getting started

Steering wheel keypad Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus entered in the display. A long press takes shown on the display. Press the thumb you to the main menu view (see wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or page 204). to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth- Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus connected cell phone. shown on the display. Press the thumb Mute wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or to answer an incoming call on a Bluetooth- connected cell phone. Voice control (for operating Bluetooth- connected cell phones and the optional navigation system)

Standard steering wheel keypad Rear control panel with headphone Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves sockets* 05 between preset radio stations or tracks on Headphones with an impedance of a disc. Press and hold to search within 16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher tracks or to tune to the next/previous are recommended for best sound reproduction. strong radio station. Steering wheel keypad with voice control button2 Volume Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, inter- between preset radio stations or tracks on rupt the current function, reject an incom- a disc. Press and hold to search within ing phone call or erase any characters tracks or to tune to the next/previous entered in the display. Press and hold to go strong radio station. to the highest level in the current menu. Volume From the highest level in the current menu, press and hold to go to the infotainment EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, inter- system's main menu view (see page 204). rupt the current function, reject an incoming phone call or erase any characters

2 Models equipped with the optional navigation system only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 05 Infotainment

Getting started

Scroll/search forward and back Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD tracks/ audio files or to search for the next available radio station.

Limitations

NOTE • The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc, etc.) being played through the infotainment system's speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel. Volume control (right/left sides) • In order to select and play an external Scroll/search forward and back device using MODE, the device must be connected to the infotainment system. 05 MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD Radio3, Sirius1*, Sirius2*, Disc, USB, iPod, Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF. Headphones sockets (3.5 mm)

Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated by pressing MODE when the audio system is switched on. It is switched off automatically when the audio system is switched off or by a long press on MODE.

3 U.S. models only.

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

FAV—storing a shortcut • iPod INFO—displaying additional • Bluetooth* information • AUX Favorites can also be stored for TEL, MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. See page 127 for a description of the menu system. To program a function on the FAV button: 1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). 2. Select a waveband or function (AM, Disc, etc.). 3. Press and hold FAV until the mode/func- The FAV button can be used to store frequently tion's "favorite" menu is displayed. used functions, making it possible to start the 4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of In certain cases, more information may be 05 stored function by simply pressing FAV. One alternatives displayed and press OK/ available (about a radio station, song, artist, favorite (for example, Equalizer) can be pro- MENU to confirm (store) your choice. etc.) than is currently displayed on the screen. grammed for each of the following infotainment > The next time the infotainment system Press the INFO button to display all of the system functions: available information. mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected, In RADIO mode a short press on FAV will start the stored function. • AM • FM1/FM2 A favorite function can also be programmed using the MY CAR menu system. See page SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2* • 128 for more information. In MEDIA mode • DISC • USB

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

Basic sound settings • DPL II center level/3 channel center mended. Select one of the options under 1 Press SOUND to display the basic sound set- level : Volume for the center speaker. Audio settings Sound stage. ting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue press- • DPL II surround level1 (only when Sur- ing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other round is on): Surround level. Audio volume and automatic volume setting alternatives. control The infotainment system compensates for dis- Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save Advanced sound settings rupting noises in the passenger compartment the new setting by pressing OK/MENU. Equalizer by increasing the volume according to the Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to Sound levels for different frequencies can be speed of the vehicle. The level of sound com- display: adjusted separately using this feature. pensation can be set at low, medium, high or 1 off. Select the level under Audio settings • Surround: Can be set to On or Off. When To do so: switched on, the system will automatically Volume compensation. select settings for the best sound quality, 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio External audio source volume which is normally DPLII and will settings and select Equalizer If an external devices such as an MP3 player or appear in the display. If the recording was 2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies 05 an iPod is connected to the AUX socket, the made using Dolby Digital technology, play- and press OK/MENU. back will be provided with this setting and device's volume may be different from the vol- will appear in the display. If Sur- 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and ume of the internal sound sources such as the confirm the change by pressing OK/ disc player or the radio. If the external sound round is switched off, audio will be provided using 3 channel stereo. MENU. Do the same for the other frequen- source's volume is too high, the quality of the cies. sound may be impaired. To help prevent this, • Bass: Bass level. adjust the input volume of the external audio 4. When you have finished making your set- Treble: Treble level. source: • tings, press EXIT to save. • Fader: Balance between the front and rear speakers. Sound stage2 • Balance: Balance between the right and The sound experience can be optimized for the left speakers. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. If the front and rear seats are occupied, the sound stage setting Front seats is recom-

1 Premium Sound Multimedia only 2 Premium Sound Multimedia only

208 05 Infotainment

General infotainment functions

NOTE intended to enable the user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her personal tastes. Sound quality may be affected if the MP3 player is being charged while the system is in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket while it is being played.

1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX. Press OK/MENU or wait for several seconds. 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume. 05 Optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimal sound reproduction using digital signal pro- cessing. This calibration takes into account factors such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for each combination of vehicle/infotainment system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into consideration the volume level, radio reception, and the speed of the vehicle. The settings that are described in this manual, (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only

209 05 Infotainment

Radio

General functions Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/ NOTE FM1/FM2) • This list will only display the frequencies Automatic tuning of the stations currently being received, 1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this but- not a complete list of all radio frequen- ton to toggle to the desired waveband cies on the currently selected wave- (AM, FM1, etc.). band. 2. Release the button and wait several sec- • If the signal from the currently tuned onds or press OK/MENU. station is weak, this may prevent the radio from updating the list of stations. 3. Press the left or right arrow keys on the If this occurs, press while the list center console control panel to search for of stations is displayed to switch to the next available station. manual tuning mode and select a sta- List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2 tion. If the list of stations is no longer RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1, only) displayed, turn TUNE in either direction 05 FM2, Sirius1* or Sirius2* wavebands. The radio automatically compiles a list of the to display the list again and press Number key buttons (0-9) strongest FM stations whose signals are cur- . rently being received. This enables you to find Navigate among the menu alternatives in stations when driving in areas where radio sta- the display by turning TUNE. The list will disappear from the display after tions and their frequencies are unfamiliar. several seconds. Confirm your selection or access the radio To access this list: menus by pressing OK/MENU. If the station list is no longer displayed, turn Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go 1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or TUNE in either direction and press on the to the next/previous strong station, press FM2). number key pad on the center console to switch to manual tuning (or to switch back from briefly to tune to a preset station. 2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. manual tuning to the "list of stations" function). RADIO menu selections can be made from the This displays the list of stations in the area. center console or the steering wheel keypad. The currently tuned station will be indi- Manual tuning See page 252 for more information about the cated in the list by magnified text. By default, the list of stations of the strongest stations in the area will be displayed when you infotainment menu system. 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of select a station on the list. stations"). While the list of stations is displayed,

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Radio press on the number key pad on the cen- NOTE been stored on the number key button ter console to switch to manual tuning, which used. The radio is initially set to automatically enables you to select a frequency from the search for stations in the area in which you A list of preset stations can be displayed. This complete list of all radio frequencies available are driving (see the preceding section, "List function can be activated/deactivated in AM/ on the currently selected waveband. In other of stations"). FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in words, in manual tuning mode, turning TUNE However, if you have switched to manual AM menu Show presets one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, tuning (by pressing on the number key etc.). pad on the center console while the list of Scan To manually tune a station: stations is displayed), the radio will remain The function automatically searches the cur- in manual tuning mode the next time it is rent waveband for radio stations. When a sta- 1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this but- switched on. To switch back to "list of station is found, it is played for several seconds ton to toggle to the desired waveband tions" mode, turn TUNE one step (to display before scanning is resumed. While the station (AM, FM1, etc.) and wait for several sec- the full list of stations) and press . is playing it can be stored as a preset in the onds or press OK/MENU to confirm. Please note that if you press when the usual way (see "Manually storing preset sta- 2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency tions"). list of stations is not displayed, this will acti- 05 vate the INFO function (see page 207 for To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to more information about this function). FM menu Scan or in AM menu Scan. Storing preset stations Ten preset stations can be stored for each Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT. waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). NOTE Stored preset stations are selected using the number key buttons on the center console. Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function. Manually storing preset stations 1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station"). Radio text Some stations transmit information on pro- 2. Hold in one of the number key buttons. gram content, artists, etc. This information can > The sound will be muted for several sec- be shown on the display. onds and when it returns, the station has

211 05 Infotainment

Radio

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show developer of a broadcasting technology called channel and any sub-channels that may radio text. IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to also be available on that particular fre- the method of transmitting a digital radio quency. See also the section "Sub-chan- broadcast signal centered on the same fre- nels" below). HD Radio reception (U.S. models ൅ quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- only) • When receiving a digital signal there is no quency. multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ Introduction The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" crackling due to outside influences. since it is both analogue and digital. During How HD broadcasting works hybrid operation, receivers still continue to HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD and broadcasts of this type are available in radio receivers incorporate both modes of many areas of the United States. However, reception, where the receiver will automatically there are a few key differences: switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. • Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, nal, stations send out a bundled signal – 05 the symbol will appear in the audio sys- both analogue and digital. tem display. The symbol is "grayed-out" when • An HD radio receiver can receive both dig- HD Radio is in standby mode and white when ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast. on the terrain and location of the vehicle Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio (which will influence the signal strength), broadcast More information about HD radio and IBOC the receiver will determine which signal to can be found on Ibiquity's website, receive. NOTE www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. Limitations HD radio volume may fade in and out at Benefits of digital broadcasting times due to coverage limitations. • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality only): The main channel is the only channel and AM as analogue FM). that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- HD radio is a brand name registered by the • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the ber of listening choices through “multicast- channels, they are broadcast in digital ing” (consisting of a frequency's main mode only. The main FM channel will be

1 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

212 05 Infotainment

Radio

displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC NOTE 3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD (Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate Radio. there are sub-channels available) The sub- There may be a noticeable difference in sound quality when a change from analogue 4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will FM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 disappear from the box on the display WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such as: screen). • Reception coverage area: Due to current This will disable the radio's capability to receive IBOC transmitter power limitations, the • Volume increase or decrease digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- reception coverage area in digital mode is Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ • tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM somewhat more limited than the station's Treble cut or boost receiver. Please note that when HD is switched analogue coverage area. Please be aware • Time alignment (Digital program mate- off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- that as with any radio broadcast technol- rial in extreme cases can be as much as ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and nels (see the following section for a more 8 seconds behind the analogue). This detailed explanation of sub-channels). building location can have positive or neg- will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. ative effects on radio reception. Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X The above items are dependant on the • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue broadcaster's equipment settings and do will appear in the box on the display screen). blending: Analogue to digital blending will not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio Please note that this will only switch HD on or 05 occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- receiver or antenna systems. off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). set threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak Sub-channels reception) and is normal. Switching HD on or off The factory setting for HD radio is off. How- ever, when driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and in one of the AM or FM modes. 2. Press OK/MENU in the center console control panel. Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels

213 05 Infotainment

Radio

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE Sirius satellite radio* wavebands only) will also have sub-channels offering additional types of programming or • When the radio has gone into HD mode, Listening to satellite radio music. it may take several seconds before the The Sirius satellite system consists of a number ">" symbol (if the current frequency has of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed any sub-channels) is displayed to the orbit. to the left of the frequency number and a num- left of the frequency. Pressing and hold- ber will be displayed to the right of the fre- ing the arrow keys for approximately NOTE quency number indicating that the currently 1 second before the main-/sub-channel tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. icon is displayed will cause the radio to • The digital signals from the Sirius satel- The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are tune to the next available radio station, lites are line-of-sight, which means that currently listening to the first sub-channel on not to the current station's sub-chan- physical obstructions such as bridges, frequency 93.9. nels. tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception. Selecting sub-channels • When you are no longer in broadcasting Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • nel, No reception will be displayed. lic objects transported on roof racks or 05 and hold the right arrow key on the center con- The radio will then be muted and it will in a ski box, or other antennas that may sole or on the steering wheel keypad for be necessary to tune to or search for a impede signals from the SIRIUS satel- approximately 1 second. To go back to the new radio station. lites. main channel, press and hold the left arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, Selecting Sirius radio mode subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the see page 211 for information on storing sta- 1. With the infotainment system switched on, right arrow key on the center console or on the tions. press RADIO. steering wheel keypad for approximately If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it 2. Continue pressing RADIO (or turn TUNE to 1 second. may take up to 6 seconds before the channel scroll) to select SAT 1 or SAT 2 and press If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main becomes audible. If you press this button while OK/MENU (or wait for several seconds). channel, pressing and holding the left arrow you are out of digital range of the transmitter, Activating Sirius radio will be displayed. key for approximately 1 second will tune to the No HD reception 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no next lower radio frequency. audio, which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text Subscription

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Radio

update needed is displayed (see also > The channels in the selected category NOTE "Selecting a channel"). are displayed. • The numbers of skipped or locked 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). NOTE channels will not be displayed. 3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the • If a channel is locked, the access code Sirius ID will be displayed. The Sirius ID can • The category All is default, which ena- must be entered before the channel can also be accessed from the menu (press bles you to scroll through the entire list be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" OK/MENU, turn TUNE to scroll to the of available satellite channels. on page 217. Advanced settings menu, press OK/ • The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year. This MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and press OK/ Direct channel entry takes approximately two minutes and MENU to display the number). The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical will interrupt normal broadcasting. A 4. Updating subscription will be displayed message will be displayed while updat- order throughout all of the categories. To while the subscription is being updated, ing is in progress. Information on chan- access a channel directly: after which the display will return to the nel or feature updates is available at 1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list. normal view. www.sirius.com. 2. Use the number key buttons to enter the 05 SIRIUS ID channel's number. The SIRIUS ID (sometimes referred to as the Selecting a channel 3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is required There are three ways of tuning in a channel: channel, even if it belongs to a category when contacting the Sirius Call Center. It is • Using the left and right arrow keys to go to other than the currently selected one. used to activate your account and when mak- the next channel. Skipped channels (see ing any account transactions. page 217) will be excluded. Scanning SCAN automatically searches through the list Selecting a channel category • By turning the TUNE control and selecting a channel from the list of satellite channels. The search will only be 1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels. • Through direct channel entry. carried out in the selected category, see 2. Press EXIT. page 211 for more detailed information on the scan function. 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of categories and press OK/MENU to make a Storing a channel selection. A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored; 10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see

215 05 Infotainment

Radio

page 211 for detailed information on storing 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and Radio text channels. press OK/MENU. This text provides information about the song that is currently playing. To turn this feature on • A long press on one of the number keys 3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and stores the currently tuned channel on that press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show key. the function. radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle between on or off. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in SAT 1 or SAT 2 mode will tune NOTE to the preset satellite channel stored on Advanced Sirius settings that button, regardless of the currently When the song has ended, the radio will remain tuned to the channel on which the This menu function enables you to make set- selected channel category. song was played. tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. Searching for and storing songs To access this menu: The Song Seek function provides notification Song memory 1. Press OK/MENU. when Sirius is broadcasting the songs selected Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu in song memory. enables you Song memory memory. and press OK/MENU. 05 to store the name of the song for future To add the currently playing song to the list: advance notification when that song is being played. 1. Press OK/MENU. WARNING 2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/ Settings should be made when the vehicle Song seek is at a standstill. When a satellite radio channel plays one of the MENU. songs stored in the song memory while the 3. Scroll to Add current song to song The following settings can be made in the Sir- Song seek feature is activated, the listener will memory and press OK/MENU. be alerted by a text message and an audible ius menu: signal. If a new song is selected when the memory is • Channel skip settings can be made full, you will be prompted to delete a song from Channel lock settings can be made Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT the list. To do so: • to cancel. • The channel access code can be displayed 1. Press OK/MENU. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: or changed (see also "Locking a channel" 2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of on page 217) 1. Press OK/MENU. songs. Select a song and press OK/ • Your Sirius ID can be displayed MENU to delete it from the list. • Reset Sirius settings

216 05 Infotainment

Radio

Skip options be skipped the next time the ignition is 7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all This function is used to remove a channel from switched on. channels in the category or turn TUNE the list of available channels. to scroll to a channel and press OK/ Channel lock MENU to select it. Multiple channels can Skipping a channel Access to specific channels can be restricted be selected. 1. Press OK/MENU. (locked). A locked channel will not provide The selected channel is now locked and a 2. audio, song titles, or artist information. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. checked box will be displayed to indicate this. 3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip NOTE It will be necessary to enter the channel access options menu. code2 in order to listen to a locked channel. All channels are initially unlocked. 4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip Unlocking a channel list. 2 Locking a channel A channel's access code is required to unlock 5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories 1. Press OK/MENU. a channel. or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and Unlock all channels press OK/MENU to select it. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. This permanently removes all channels from 05 6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all 3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll the locked list and makes them available for channels in the category or turn TUNE to the Lock options menu and press OK/ selection. MENU. to scroll to a channel and press OK/ Temporarily unlock all channels MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple 4. Use the number keys in the central control This function will temporarily unlock all chan- channels can be selected. panel to enter the channel access code2 nels and make them available for selection. The Unskip all channels and press OK/MENU. channels remain on the locked list and will This removes all channels from the skip list and 5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on. makes them available for selection. lock list. CHANGE CODE Temporary unskip all channels 6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories This function makes it possible to change the This function will temporarily unskip all chan- or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and channel access code. The default code is nels and make them available for selection. The press OK/MENU to select it. channels remain on the skip list and will again 0000. To change the code:

2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code."

217 05 Infotainment

Radio

1. Select Change code in theLock options menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU. 3. Confirm the new code and press OK/ MENU. If an incorrect code is entered, the text Incorrect code is displayed. If you have forgotten the access code: 1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced settings menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for several seconds. 05 3. The current code will be displayed. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with assistance. SIRIUS ID This function displays the 12-digit Sirius activation ID.

218 05 Infotainment

Media player

CD/DVD functions The media player supports and can play the Disc eject following main types of discs and files: For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc • Purchased CDs (CD Audio) must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back into the slot. • Home-burned CDs with audio and /or video files Pause • Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or When the audio system volume is turned off video files completely, the player will pause and will • Purchased DVDs resume playing when the volume is turned up again. See page 222 for a list of compatible formats. Media menu selections can be made from the Navigating a disc and playing tracks center console or the steering wheel keypad. CD audio discs See page 252 for more information about the Center console control panel Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to infotainment menu system. navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con- Disc slot firm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT 05 Playing a disc MEDIA button to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the Press MEDIA several times until Disc is dis- playlist's root level. Eject played. Release the button and wait several seconds or press OK/MENU. If there is a disc The / buttons on the center console or Number keys in the player, it will begin playing automatically. steering wheel keypad can also be used to TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu Otherwise, Insert disc will be displayed. Insert change tracks. selections/folders/tracks. the disc into the slot with the text side upward Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files and it will begin playing automatically. OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to tion or access the menus for the currently If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to con- selected source (e.g., DISC).Left/right folder structure will be read by the system. It firm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to arrow keys: Fast back/forward and change may take several seconds until the disc begins stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure. track or chapter1. playing, depending on its quality and the Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's amount of information it contains. root level. Forward/back and change tracks or chapter.

1 DVDs only

219 05 Infotainment

Media player

The / buttons on the center console or NOTE on audio CDs. The database contains songs steering wheel keypad can also be used to that are currently popular. If the media player Video images will only be visible when the change audio/video files. finds a track in the database, the album title vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is and artist's name are displayed, and the title, The following symbols are used in the display: traveling faster than approximately 4 mph (6 km/h), No visual media available while artist and album for each song is also dis- • - audio files driving will be displayed. Sound from the played. If the current audio CD is not found in film will still be audible and video images will the database, CD text from the disc is used. If • - video files be shown again when the vehicle stops. no CD text is available, only track 1, track 2, • - folders etc., will be displayed. When a file has been played, the player will NOTE Scan2 continue to play the rest of the files (of the same This function plays the first ten seconds of type) in the current folder. When all of the files Some copy protected audio files or home- burned audio files may not be read by the each track/audio file. To start scanning: in the folder have been played, the player will player. automatically go to the next folder and play the 1. Press OK/MENU. files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated). 2. Turn TUNE to Scan. 05 DVD videos The system automatically detects and changes See page 221 for information. > The first ten seconds of each track/ settings if a disc containing only audio or only audio file will be played. video files is inserted in the player and will play Fast forward/reverse 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur- these files. However, the system will not Press and hold the / buttons to fast rent track/audio file will continue playing. change settings if a disc containing both audio forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for and video files is inserted and the player will audio files but several speeds can be chosen Random2 continue to play the current type of file. for video files. Press the / buttons sev- This function plays the tracks in random order eral times to increase the speed. Release the (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be button to return to normal viewing speed. scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to tracks in random order: Gracenote track identification 1. Press OK/MENU, If the vehicle is equipped with the optional navigation system, this system uses a hard drive 2. Turn TUNE to Random containing a database that recognizes music

2 Not video DVDs

220 05 Infotainment

Media player

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate NOTE be paused). Press OK/MENU to select a chap- the random play function. ter and return to the normal view. If a film was Video images will only be visible when the playing, it will resume). Press EXIT to access Press the / buttons on the center con- vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is the list of titles. sole or steering wheel keypad to change traveling faster than approximately 4 mph tracks/audio files. (6 km/h), No visual media available while Turn TUNE to select a title and press OK/ driving will be displayed. Sound from the MENU to confirm and return to the list of chap- Repeat folder3 film will still be audible and video images will ters. Press EXIT to cancel and return to the This function makes it possible to play files in be shown again when the vehicle stops. normal view (without having made a selection). a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been Changing chapters or title played, the first file will begin again. To acti- Navigating in a DVD's menus TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and vate: navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is 1. Press OK/MENU. currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose a chapter and return to the normal view in the 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. display (if a film was playing, it will resume). 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate Press EXIT to access the list of titles. 05 the function. In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selection and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also Playing video DVDs returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT Play to cancel and return to the normal view (without When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may having made a selection). appear on the display, giving you access to It is also possible to change chapters by press- extra functions and settings such as choice of ing / on the center console control subtitle and language, scene selection, etc. Buttons in the center console control panel, shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's panel or on the steering wheel keypad. menus. Advanced settings Changing chapters or titles Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and Angle navigate among them (if a film is playing, it will If the DVD supports this function, it is possible to select a camera angle for a certain scene.

3 Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

221 05 Infotainment

Media player

This can be done in DVD mode under DVD root To return to the factory settings, select menu Advanced settings Angle. Reset . DivX Video On Demand Compatible formats The media player can be registered to play The media player can play a number of differ- DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or ent types of files and disc formats, and is com- USB. The registration code can be found by patible with the formats listed in the following pressing the MY CAR button, and going to table. Settings Information DivX® VOD code. See page 127 for more information NOTE about the menu system. Dual format (double-sided discs) such as See also www.divx.com/vod for more informa- DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than nor- tion. mal discs and may not play in your infotainment system. Screen settings If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3 05 Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be is not moving) for: ignored. • Brightness • Contrast Audio CD-Audio, mp3, wma, 1. PressOK/MENU and choose Image formats aac, m4a settings and confirm by pressing OK/ Video for- CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx, MENU. mats avi, asf 2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and press OK/MENU. 3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and confirm the change by pressing OK/ MENU. Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the screen settings list.

222 05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

Connecting external devices connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's NOTE ignition is on or if the engine is running). • The system supports a number of To connect a device: iPod models produced in 2005 or later. 1. Press MEDIA several times to come to the • In order to help avoid damage to the desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). USB socket, it will be switched off if Release the button and wait for several there is a short circuit or if the con- seconds or press OK/MENU. nected device uses too much current > For example, if a USB device has been (which can happen if the device does selected, the text Connect USB will be not comply with the USB standard). The displayed. USB socket will reactivate the next time the ignition is switched on if the problem 2. Connect the device to one of the sockets no longer exists. If the problem persists, in the center console storage compartment contact a trained and authorized Volvo Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage com- (see the illustration). service technician. partment between the front seats The text Reading USB will be displayed while 05 An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3 the system reads the device's folders. This may MEDIA menu selections can be made from the player can be connected to the audio system take a short time, depending on the folder center console or the steering wheel keypad. via one of the sockets in the center console structure and the number of files. See page 252 for more information about the storage compartment. A device connected to infotainment menu system. the USB socket can be operated using the When this information has been loaded, track vehicle's infotainment system controls. information will be displayed and a track can Navigating and playing tracks1 be selected. There is a notch at the right rear of the center Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and console for routing wires to external devices. Tracks can be selected in two ways: to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice This notch helps prevent the wires from being • Turn TUNE and press OK/MENU pinched when the cover is closed. and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and • Use the right or left arrow keys exit the playlist or to go back in the folder struc- An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable ( / ) on the center console control ture. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest batteries will also be charged if the device is panel or on the steering wheel keypad level in the playlist.

1 USB and iPod only

223 05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets

The / buttons on the center console or for video files. Press the / buttons sev- Search1 steering wheel keypad can also be used to eral times to increase the speed. Release the The keypad in the center console can be used change tracks/files. button to return to normal viewing speed. to search for a file in the currently selected folder. The following symbols are used in the display: Scan1 Start the search by either turning TUNE (to • - audio files This function plays the first ten seconds of access the folders) or by pressing one of the each track/audio file. To start scanning: • - video files character keys to enter a letter/number. Pos- 1. Press OK/MENU. sible search results will be displayed as char- • - folders 2. Turn TUNE to Scan. acters are entered. When a file has been played, the player will Play the file by pressing OK/MENU. continue to play the rest of the files (of the same > The first ten seconds of each track/ audio file will be played. type) in the current folder. When all of the files Repeat2 in the folder have been played, the player will 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The cur- This function makes it possible to play files in 1 automatically go to the next folder (unless rent track/audio file will continue playing. a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been Repeat folder is activated) and play the files played, the first file will begin again. To acti- 05 Random1 in it. vate: This function plays the tracks in random order The system automatically detects and changes (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be 1. Press OK/MENU. settings if a device containing only audio or scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to only video files is connected to the USB socket 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. tracks in random order: and will play these files. However, the system 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate will not change settings if the device contains 1. Press OK/MENU, the function. both audio and video files and will continue to 2. Turn TUNE to Random play the current type of file. 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate External sound sources Fast forward/reverse1 the random play function. USB flash drive Press and hold the / buttons to fast To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is Press the / buttons on the center con- forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for advisable to only store music files on the drive. sole or steering wheel keypad to change audio files but several speeds can be chosen It will take considerably longer for the system tracks/audio files.

1 USB and iPod only 2 USB only

224 05 Infotainment

AUX/USB sockets to index the files on the drive if it contains any- iPod thing other than compatible music files. An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the USB cable. NOTE The system will only play audio files from an • The system supports removable media iPod. that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 file system. It can index up to NOTE 1,000 folders and a maximum of 254 sub-folders/files for each folder. How- When an iPod is used as a sound source, ever, the highest folder level can sup- the vehicle's audio system has a menu port up to 1,000 sub-folders/files. structure similar to the one in the iPod. See the iPod's manual for detailed information. • When using a longer type of USB device, connecting it with a USB adapter cable will help reduce mechan- Compatible file formats via the USB ical wear on the USB socket and on the socket 05 device. The following audio and video files are supported by the system when playing a device con- USB hub nected to the USB socket. A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket, making it possible to connect several Audio formats mp3, wma, aac, USB devices at the same time. To select one m4a of the devices, go to the menu USB menu Video formats divx, avi, asf Select USB device MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle's audio system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/ Mass Storage Device.

225 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth media

Streaming audio NOTE Overview Introduction Any Bluetooth media players used must The vehicle's media player is equipped with support Audio/Video Remote Control Pro- Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files file (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribu- tion Profile (A2DP). The player must use from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older or personal digital assistant (PDA). Navigation versions of these standards are used, cer- and control of the device can be done through tain features (e.g., scan or random) may not the vehicle's center console control panel or function. the steering wheel keypad. On certain external Not all cell phones or media players are fully devices, it is also possible to change tracks compatible with the vehicle's Bluetooth sys- from the device. tem. A list of compatible devices is available at you Volvo retailer or at www.volvo- In order to listen streaming audio, the vehicle's cars.us. media player must first be put in Bluetooth Center console control panel mode. To do so, Press MEDIA several times VOL: Volume control 05 until Bluetooth is displayed. Release the but- The vehicle's media player can only play audio MEDIA button ton and wait several seconds or press OK/ files through the Bluetooth function. MENU. TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alter- Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus natives and folders shown in the display. from the center console control panel or the OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selec- steering wheel keypad. See page 252 for addition or access the menus. tional information about navigating the various EXIT: Press to go back in the menu struc- menus. ture or cancel a function. Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse within a track. The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad can be used in the same way. MEDIA menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad.

226 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth media

See page 252 for more information about the Bluetooth-names of the devices found 1. Press MEDIA several times until infotainment menu system. will appear in the center console dis- Bluetooth is displayed, release the button play. and wait for several seconds or press OK/ MENU. Pairing and connecting an external 5. Select the device to be paired and press device OK/MENU. 2. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth Before an external device can be connected, it function is turned on and that the device is must be paired to the infotainment system. The 6. Using the external device’s keypad, enter the digits shown in the audio system’s dis- "discoverable." See the devices user's procedure for connecting an external device guide if necessary. varies, depending whether or not the device play and press the device's button used to has previously been paired to the infotainment confirm a choice. 3. Press OK/MENU. system. A maximum of 10 external devices can The external device will be automatically paired 4. Turn TUNE to Change Bluetooth be paired and each device only needs to be and connected to the infotainment system. device and confirm by pressing OK/ paired once. To pair a device: Audio files can now be selected using the MENU. 1. Press MEDIA several times until / buttons in the center console or on > After a short time, the external device's Bluetooth is displayed, release the button the steering wheel keypad. name will appear in the display. If other 05 and wait for several seconds or press OK/ devices that have been paired are in MENU. Automatic connection range, their names will also be displayed. 2. Press OK/MENU. When the Bluetooth function is active and the most recently paired device is within range, it > 5. Select the device to be connected by turn- When Add device is displayed, press is automatically connected. When the infotain- OK/MENU. ing TUNE and pressing OK/MENU to con- ment system searches for the most recently firm. 3. paired device, its name is shown in the display. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth > The external device will be connected to To connect another paired device, press function is turned on and that the device is the infotainment system. "discoverable." See the device's user's EXIT. See the following section for information guide if necessary. about switching to another device. Audio files can now be selected using the / buttons in the center console or on 4. Press OK/MENU. Switching to another device the steering wheel keypad. > The infotainment system will search for It is possible to switch among paired external devices that are in range, which Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To Removing a paired device may take several minutes. The do so: 1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU.

227 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth media

2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth Bluetooth version information device and press OK/MENU. This feature offers information about the 3. Select the device to be removed by turning Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's TUNE and confirm by pressing OK/ infotainment system. This information can be MENU. found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth > A question asking if you would like to software version in car. remove the device will be displayed. 4. Press OK/MENU to confirm or EXIT to cancel.

Disconnecting an external device The external device is automatically disconnected from the audio system if it is moved out of range. 05 Random This function plays the audio files on the external device in random order (shuffle). This function can be activated/deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Random Press the / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change tracks.

Scanning audio files on an external device This function plays the first ten seconds of each audio file. This function can be activated/ deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan.

228 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction cell phone can always be used regardless of USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130 whether or not the phone is connected to the FCC WARNING hands-free system. Changes or modifications not expressly TEL menu selections can be made from the approved by the party responsible for compli- center console or the steering wheel keypad. ance could void the user’s authority to operate See page 252 for more information about the the equipment. infotainment menu system. IC RSS-Gen NOTE This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled Not all cell phones are fully compatible with equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency the hands-free system. A list of compatible (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to phones is available at your Volvo retailer or OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency at www.volvocars.us System overview (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very Cell phone low levels of RF energy that it deemed to com- WARNING ply without maximum permissive exposure 05 Location of the microphone evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it Never use the hands-free feature or any should be installed and operated with at least Steering wheel keypad other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. 8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator Center console control panel and display Distraction can lead to a serious accident. and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). ® Bluetooth hands-free Compliance Canada: IC 700BIAM2101 This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- FCC/IC common sentence less connection between a Bluetooth-ena- This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules bled cell phone and the vehicle’s infotainment and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject system. This enables the infotainment system to the following two conditions: (1) this device to function as a hands-free connection and may not cause interference, and (2) this device allows you to remote-control a number of the must accept any interference, including inter- phone’s functions. The microphone used by ference that may cause undesired operation of this system is located near the driver's side sun this device. visor (2). The buttons and other controls on the

229 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Bluetooth® functions in the center Getting started 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth hands- console control panel Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad free system by briefly pressing the TEL and in the center console to access, navigate button. Continue by pressing OK/MENU. and make selections in the hands-free sys- 3. Select Change phone and press OK/ tem’s menus. MENU. Activating/deactivating > Add phone will be displayed. If other A short press on the TEL button in the center cell phones have already been paired console activates the hands-free system. The with the infotainment system, their symbol in the display indicates that the names will also be displayed. Press OK/ hands-free system is active. MENU. 4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode, A long press on the TEL button deactivates the press OK/MENU. hands-free system and disconnects the cell > The infotainment system will search for phone. cell phones that are in range, which 05 Character keys containing letters and numbers for dialing numbers, adding Connecting cell phones takes approximately 30 seconds. Any phone book entries, etc. The procedure for connecting a cell phone var- phones detected will be displayed with their Bluetooth names. The hands-free TEL: Press this button to activate/deacti- ies, depending on the phone itself and on system’s Bluetooth name will appear in vate the Bluetooth function. whether or not the phone has been previously paired with the infotainment system (see page the cell phone’s display as My Volvo TUNE: Turn to navigate among the menu 227 for instructions on pairing an external Car. alternatives in the display. device). 5. Select one of the cell phones shown in the OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to center console display. call, confirm your selection or access the the hands-free system for the first time: phone menus. Incoming calls can also be 6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the answered by pressing the thumb wheel on Method 1: using the vehicle's menus digits shown in the center console display and press the button on the cell phone the steering wheel keypad. 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth func- used to confirm a choice. EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase tion to make the phone discoverable (refer characters that have been entered, end an to the phone’s owner’s manual if neces- ongoing function. This function is also sary) or go to www.volvocars.com available on the steering wheel keypad.

230 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Method 2: using the cell phone’s menus Making a call When the cell phone is disconnected from the hands-free system, a call in progress can be 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly 1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the continued using the cell phone’s own speaker pressing the TEL button in the center con- center console display and that the hands- and microphone. sole. If there is a cell phone connected, free function is in telephone mode. disconnect it from the hands-free system. 2. Dial the desired phone number using the Even if the cell phone has been disconnected manually, some phones may reconnect auto- 2. Make the vehicle discoverable via the center console keypad or use the speed matically to the most recently used hands-free Bluetooth function by pressing OK/ dial function (see page 236). In normal unit, for example when a new call is initiated. MENU and activating the menu selection view (see page 203 for information about Phone settings Discoverable. the various display views). It is also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to access the Handling calls 3. Perform a search with the cell phone's phone book and then counter-clockwise Bluetooth function (see the cell phone's for the call list. See page 233 for more Incoming calls user's guide if necessary). information about the phone book. Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad) to answer a 4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices 3. Press OK/MENU call, even if the infotainment system is cur- shown in the cell phone’s display. 05 End or reject a call by pressing EXIT. rently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or 5. When prompted, enter a PIN code of your MEDIA). choice in the cell phone using the cell Disconnecting the cell phone Press EXIT to reject a call. phone's keypad. Enter the same PIN code The cell phone is automatically disconnected from the infotainment system if it is moved out in the infotainment system using the sys- Automatic answer of range. tem's keypad in the center console. This function means that incoming calls will be 6. Connect to My Volvo Car from the cell The cell phone can be manually disconnected answered automatically. Activate or deactivate phone. from the hands-free system by pressing and the function in the menu system under Phone holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone menu Call options Auto answer. The cell phone will be paired (registered) and menu Disconnect phone. See also page will be connected automatically to the infotain- 232 for more information about connections. Call settings ment system. For more information on pairing While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or and connecting a cell phone, see page 233. The hands-free system is also deactivated the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad when the ignition is switched off (or if the to access the following functions: driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive).

231 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

• Mute: mute the infotainment system’s Voice mail volume and adjust the volume by turning microphone. In normal view, a speed dial number for voice VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT. • Mobile phone: transfer the call from mail can be programmed and accessed by Ringing tones hands-free to the cell phone. On certain pressing and holding 1. The hands-free system’s integrated ringing cell phones, the connection will be broken, The number for voice mail can be changed in which is normal. The hands-free function tones can be selected in Phone menu phone mode in Phone menu Call options will ask if you would like to reconnect. Phone settings Sounds and volume Voicemail number Change number. • Dial number: dial a third party during an Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc. ongoing call using the number keys (the current call will be put on hold). Sound settings NOTE Call lists Call volume The connected cell phone’s ring tone may Call lists are copied to the hands-free function Call volume can be only be adjusted during a not be switched off when one of the hands- each time a cell phone is connected and the call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel key- free system's ringing tones is used. lists are updated while the phone is connected. pad or the infotainment system’s VOL control. 05 In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s to see the All calls list. Infotainment system volume ring tone1, go to Phone menu Phone If no phone call is in progress, volume for the settings Sounds and volume Ring In phone mode, the various call lists can be infotainment system can be adjusted in the displayed in Phone menu Call lists: normal way with the infotainment system's signals Mobile phone ring signal. • All calls VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad. • Missed calls Infotainment system sound can be automati- More information about pairing and connecting cell phones • Answered calls cally muted when a phone call is received in Phone menu Phone settings Sounds A maximum of 10 cell phones can be paired • Dialed calls (certain cell phones show this and volume Mute radio/media. with the hands-free system. Pairing only needs list in reverse order) to be done once for each phone. After pairing, • Call duration Ringing volume the cell phone no longer needs to be in sight or If no number has been stored, this menu can In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone discoverable. Only one cell phone can be actively connected to hands-free at a time. be accessed by pressing and holding 1. settings Sounds and volume Ring

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

232 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Automatic connection Phone book NOTE When the hands-free system is active and the The hands-free system uses two phone books most recently connected cell phone is within Changes made from the infotainment sys- (one with the cell phone's list of contacts and tem to a contact in the cell phone's phone range, it is connected automatically. If this one with contacts saved directly in the info- book will result in a new contact being phone is not within range, the hands-free sys- tainment system), which are combined to form added to the infotainment system's phone tem will attempt to connect one of the other one phone book. book. However, this contact will not be paired cell phones. When the infotainment sys- saved in the cell phone's phone book. The The infotainment system downloads the tem searches for the most recently connected • infotainment system's display will show phone book from a connected cell phone. phone, this phone’s name appears in the dis- duplicate contacts with different icons. This phone book will only be displayed play. when this cell phone is connected to the Please also note that if a speed dial number hands-free system. is saved or if a contact's information is edi- Manual connection ted, this will result in a new contact in the To connect a phone other than the one that • The infotainment system also has an inte- infotainment system's phone book. was most recently connected or to switch grated phone book made up of contacts between cell phones that are already paired that have been saved in the system, The symbol must be displayed before with the hands-free system, go to Phone regardless of which cell phone is currently the phone book can be used and the hands- 05 menu Change phone. connected when the contact is saved. These contacts will be displayed regard- free function must be in phone mode. Removing a paired phone from the list less of the cell phone that is connected. If The infotainment system saves a copy of each In phone mode, a paired phone can be a contact has been saved in the infotain- paired cell phone's phone book. This phone removed from the list of phones in Phone ment system, the symbol will be dis- book can be copied each time the phone is menu Remove Bluetooth device. played next to it. connected. Activate/deactivate this function in phone Bluetooth version mode in Phone menu Phone settings For information about the Bluetooth version Download phone book. installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu Phone settings Bluetooth software If the phone book contains information about version in car. someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display.

233 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Contact shortcuts Buttons in the center console Searching for contacts A quick way of searching the phone book for Button Function contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clockwise to access the phone book and then coun- Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 ter-clockwise to select a contact from the list. Press OK/MENU to call. A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2 Each name in the phone book has a default phone number. If the symbol is displayed to D E F È É 3 the right of it, this indicates that there are additional phone numbers for this contact. To use G H I Ì 4 a phone number other than the default one, press the button on the center console J K L 5 control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different Searching for contacts using the text wheel phone number and press OK/MENU to call. List of characters M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6 05 It is also possible to search for a contact by using the center console keypad to enter the Switch between character entry modes first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the P Q R S ß 7 (see the following table) following table "Buttons in the center console" Phone book (list of contacts) for each button's function). T U V Ü Ù 8 To search for or edit a contact in phone mode, The list of contacts can also be accessed from go to Phone menu Phone book normal view by pressing and holding the button W X Y Z 9 Search. on the center console keypad with the first letter of the contact's name. For example, press- 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press Shift between upper and lower OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter ing and holding button 6 would provide direct case access to the section of the list with contacts keys on the center console can also be whose names begin with M. + 0 p w used. 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results # * of the search will be displayed in the phone book (3).

234 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

3. To switch from letter entry mode to the Adding a new contact 3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name entry mode for numbers or special charac- entered will be displayed in the character ters, or to go to the phone book, turn entry field (2). TUNE to one of the selections (see the 4. To switch from letter entry mode to the explanation in the following table) in the list entry mode for numbers or special charac- for switching character entry mode (2) and ters, or to toggle between upper and lower press OK/MENU. case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the explanation in the fol- Character entry modes lowing table) in the list (1) and press OK/ 123/ Toggle between letters and num- MENU. bers by pressing OK/MENU. ABC When you have finished entering the name, More Switch to special characters by select OK in the list in the display (1) and press pressing OK/MENU. Enter the name of a new contact OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone number in the same way. Switch between character entry modes This leads to the phone book (3). (see the following table) When you have entered the phone number, 05 Turn TUNE to select a contact press OK/MENU and select a tag for the num- and press OK/MENU to display Character entry field ber (Mobile phone, Home, Work or the contact's information. New contacts can be added in phone mode in General). Press OK/MENU to confirm. Phone menu Phone book New When all of the contact's information has been Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. contact. Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the char- entered, select Save contact in the menu to acters that have been entered. 1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/ save. MENU to go to the character entry mode If a number button on the center console is (see the illustration). 123/ Toggle between letters and num- pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list bers by pressing OK/MENU. of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press 2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press ABC OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter the button once to enter its first letter, twice to More Switch to special characters by keys on the center console can also be enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press pressing OK/MENU. the button to display other characters. Con- used. tinue with the next character, etc. OK Save and return to Add contact by pressing . To enter a number, press and hold the button. OK/MENU

235 05 Infotainment

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Toggle between upper and lower is activated in Phone menu Phone book case letters by pressing OK/ Receive vCard. MENU. Memory status Press OK/MENU and the cursor In phone mode, the memory status of the info- will move to the character entry tainment system's phone book and the con- field (2) at the top of the display. nected cell phone's phone book can be seen The cursor can now be moved by in Phone menu Phone book Memory turning TUNE to a position where status. new characters can be entered or deleted by pressing EXIT. In Clearing the phone book order to add characters, return to In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment text entry mode by pressing OK/ system's phone book can be cleared in Phone MENU. menu Phone book Clear phone book.

05 Speed dial NOTE Speed dial numbers can be added in phone mode in Phone menu Phone book Clearing the entries in the infotainment system's phone book does not delete entries in Speed dial. the cell phone's phone book. To use speed dial to make a call in phone mode, press a button on the center console keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact has not been saved on the speed dial number used, you will be prompted to save a contact on the number selected.

Accept vCards vCards from other cell phones can be added to the infotainment system's phone book. To enable this feature, put the infotainment system in discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature

236 05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Introduction WARNING Getting started The infotainment system's voice control fea- 1 As the driver, you have full responsibility for ture enables the driver to voice-activate cer- operating the vehicle safely and adhering to tain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell all applicable traffic regulations. phone or the navigation system. The voice control feature provides access to a NOTE number of functions in the Bluetooth hands- • The information in this section applies free and navigation systems while allowing you to using voice commands to operate a to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input Bluetooth-connected cell phone. is in dialogue form using spoken commands See also the section "Bluetooth from the user and verbal prompts from the sys- hands-free connection" beginning on tem. Voice control uses the same microphone page 229 for detailed information about as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the Voice control button on the steering wheel using a cell phone with the vehicle's illustration on page 229) and system prompts infotainment system. are provided through the infotainment sys- Activating the system 05 • The navigation system has a separate tem's front speakers. Before any phone voice commands can be user's guide containing information used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must about voice commands for operating be paired with the infotainment system. If a that system. phone command is given, the system will inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See Voice commands offer convenience and help page 230 for information on pairing a cell avoid distractions so that you can concentrate phone. on driving and focus your attention on road and Press the voice control button (1 in the illustra- traffic conditions. tion) to activate the system and initiate a command dialogue. The system will display commonly used commands on the screen when the button has been pressed.

1 Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only

237 05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

While using the voice control system, keep the Voice control support features The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which following points in mind: • Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you take a total of approximately 5 minutes to complete. • When giving commands, speak at your with the system and the procedure for giving commands. usual speed and in a normal tone of voice By default, the system will begin with the first after the tone • Training: A feature that enables the voice lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the • The vehicle's doors, windows and moon- control system to become familiar with voice control button and say "next." Go back roof should be closed when using the voice your voice and pronunciation, and allows to a previous lesson by saying "previous." control system you to set up user profiles. Two user profiles can be voice trained. Press and hold the voice control button to exit • Avoid background noises in the cabin the tutorial. when using the system These support features are accessed by pressing the MY CAR button in the center console Training The system will display up to fifteen phrases for NOTE and turning TUNE to scroll to the desired menu selection. you to say. To start the voice training proce- If you are uncertain of the commands that dure, press MY CAR and go to Settings Tutorial you can use, saying "help" will prompt the Voice settings Voice training. Select User 05 system to provide a number of commands The tutorial feature can be started in two ways: that can be used in a specific situation. 1 or User 2 and press OK/MENU to begin. Voice control commands can be cancelled NOTE After the training has been completed, remem- by: The tutorial feature can only be started when ber to set your user profile in Voice user • Saying "cancel" the vehicle is parked and the parking brake setting. is applied. • Not speaking Other voice control settings found in MY Pressing and holding the voice control CAR • By pressing the voice control button and button • • Voice user setting: Two user profiles can saying "Voice tutorial." • Pressing EXIT or one of the mode but- be set by pressing MY CAR and going to By pressing MY CAR and going to tons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). • Settings Voice settings Voice user Settings Voice settings Voice setting. Select User 1 or User 2. tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the Voice output volume: Press MY CAR and tutorial lesson. • go to Settings Voice settings Voice output volume. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the volume. Press EXIT to save the change and exit the menu.

238 05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

Using voice commands General commands. See page 127 for more "Delete" (which will erase the entire phone The driver initiates a voice command dialogue information on the menu system. number). by pressing the voice control button (see the Dialing a number Dialing from a call list illustration on page 237). The system understands the digits zero to nine. The dialogue below enables you make a call When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly These numbers can be spoken individually, in from one of your cell phone's call lists. used commands will be shown in the display. groups of several digits at a time, or the entire The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are number can be given at once. Numbers above Phone > dial from call list not part of the spoken command. nine will not be recognized. or Once you become familiar with the system, you The following is an example of a voice com- can speed up the command dialogue by briefly mand dialogue. The system's response may Phone dial from call list pressing the voice control button to skip vary depending on the situation. Continue by responding to the system's prompts from the system. The user initiates the dialogue by saying: prompts. Commands can be given in several ways. Phone > dial number For example, the command "Phone call con- Calling a contact 05 tact" can be spoken as: or The dialogue below enables you to call the pre- Phone dial number defined contacts in your cell phone. See the • "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait phone's user's guide if necessary. for a system response, and then continue System response by saying "Call contact." Number please The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > call contact • "Phone call contact"—give the entire com- User action mand at one time Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If or The following is a list of features that can be you say several digits and pause, the system Phone call contact voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected will repeat them and prompt you by saying cell phone. "Continue." Continue by responding to the system's prompts. Continue saying the digits. When you have fin- Shortcuts When calling contacts, keep the following in Shortcut commands for using the phone can ished, complete the command by saying "Dial." mind: be found in the MY CAR menu system, under Settings Voice settings Voice • You can also change the number by using • If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the dis- command list Phone commands and the commands "Correction" (which dele- tes the last group of digits spoken) or

239 05 Infotainment

Cell phone voice control

play in numbered lines and the system will prompt you to pick a line number • If there are more lines in the list than can be displayed at one time, saying "Down" will enable you to scroll downward in the list (and saying "up" will take you back up through the list). Dialing voicemail The dialogue below enables you to call your voicemail to check any messages that you may have received. Your voicemail phone number must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see page 232. The user initiates the dialogue by saying: 05 Phone > dial voicemail or Phone dial voicemail Continue by responding to the system's prompts.

240 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

Overview

05 Screen: channel A (left), channel B (right) Introduction listen to music from e.g., an iPod or from streaming audio files using the Bluetooth Headphone socket The RSE system provides entertainment for the rear seat passengers by making it possible to function. On/Off button e.g., watch a film, play music, listen to the radio The RSE system can be controlled from the or connect an external device such as a game front screen (parental control). A/V-AUX socket console. Different media can be played or viewed from Remote control RSE is fully integrated into the vehicle's info- different sources on the various screens (front Headphones tainment system and can be used at the same center console and/or the respective screens time as other infotainment features. in the rear seat). It is also possible to play or IR transceiver For example, if a rear seat passenger is using view media from the same source on one or A/V-AUX and headphones, the driver and front more of the screens. However, it is not possible seat passenger can still use the vehicle's radio to play a film from USB while a CD or DVD is or media player. However, only one disc can be being played. played in the media player at a time. You can

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

CAUTION being started and will resume when the engine Cordless headphones is running. When transporting large objects in the rear seat, be sure that there is adequate space between the object(s) and the RSE screens NOTE to help avoid scratching or damaging these Using RSE for more than approx. screens. 10 minutes when the engine is not running If necessary, cover the screens with a suit- will drain the vehicle's battery and may able material. make the engine difficult or impossible to start. A message will be displayed on the screen NOTE if the battery's charge level becomes too • The RSE screens and remote control low. may not function in very low or very high cabin temperatures. They will become Using the system's menus Switch for selecting channel A (CH.A) or operable again after the climate control Selections in the RSE menus are made using channel B (CH.B) 05 system has created a comfortable tem- the remote control. See page 247 for more On/Off button perature in the cabin. information about the RSE menus. • Keep the IR transceivers' lenses clean Volume by wiping them regularly with a damp cloth. A dirty lens could affect the func- Remote control On/Off indicator light A remote control is included with the RSE sys- tion of the remote control. Two sets of cordless headphones are included tem, which can be used to control both screens with the RSE system. in the rear seat as well as other infotainment Ignition modes and electrical current to system functions. The cordless headphones are activated using RSE the On/Off button (2). The indicator light (4) will See page 250 for more detailed information RSE can be activated with the ignition in illuminate when the headphones are on. Select about the remote control. modes I or II (and when the engine is running). CH.A (channel A) or CH.B (channel B) with See page 80 for detailed information about the switch (1). Use control (3) to adjust the volume. various ignition modes. If a film is being played, it will stop momentarily while the engine is

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

NOTE Disposing of old batteries Connecting a device to the A/V-AUX Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an socket The headphones will switch off automati- environmentally responsible manner. cally after approx. 3 minutes if they are not used. Headphone socket Replacing batteries in the headphones External headphones can be connected to the The headphones use two AAA batteries. 3.5 mm headphone socket on the side of the head restraint (see the illustration on page It is advisable to have extra batteries on hand 241 for the location of this socket). Adjust the during long trips. volume with the remote control.

A/V-AUX socket, 12-volt socket This A/V-AUX socket is used to connect external devices to the RSE system. When connect- The A/V-AUX socket is located under the center ing an external device, always follow the armrest in the tunnel console 05 instructions provided with the device. Devices 1. Connect the device's video cable to the connected through the A/V-AUX socket can yellow connector. use the screens, cordless headphones, the 3.5 mm headphone socket and the infotain- 2. Connect the left audio cable to the white ment system's speakers. connector and the right audio cable to the red one. 3. If the device is designed to use 12-volt cur- Battery cover and retaining screw CAUTION rent, connect its power cable to the 12-volt Please be aware that external devices con- 1. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove socket (see page 195 for the location of this nected through the A/V-AUX socket may the battery cover. cause interference in the RSE system. socket). 2. Remove the old batteries and insert new Always follow the device's instructions when ones in the directions indicated by the connecting it to the RSE system. symbols in the battery holder. 3. Put the cover back in place and tighten the retaining screw.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

Audio/video playback through the A/V- tinue by pressing the or button on both rear screens or different sources can be AUX socket the remote control to select a source such as selected for the respective screens. 1. Switch on one of the rear screens by press- Disc, etc. 1. Press MEDIA several times to come to ing its On/Off button. RSE on the front screen. Wait several sec- 2. Use the remote control's button to Settings made from the front center onds for your selection to be confirmed. select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front control panel 2. Turn TUNE to select one or both of the rear screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the screens and confirm by pressing OK/ remote control toward the selected MENU. screen's IR transceiver and press the 3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or button several times to come to A/V RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to con- AUX . Release the button and wait several firm. seconds to confirm your choice. 4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (for example, Disc) and confirm by pressing 3. Switch on the connected device and press OK/MENU. The selected source will begin PLAY (or the device's equivalent button). 05 playing automatically (if there is a disc in Input volume the media player). Adjust the input volume in the RSE menu, Cancel and return by pressing EXIT. under A/V AUX input volume. Settings can also be made with the remote MEDIA control. See page 250 for more detailed infor- Activating RSE TUNE mation. The RSE system can be activated using con- Muting trols on the front or rear screens. OK/MENU Audio for the rear screens can be muted from From the front seat, press MEDIA (see the fol- EXIT the front center control panel. This function can lowing illustration) and select RSE. be activated under RSE settings Mute as Selecting a source for the rear screens explained in points 2-4 in the section "Select- From the rear seat, press the screen's On/Off from the front center control panel button. Use the remote control's button ing a source for the rear screens from the front An audio/video source for the rear screen(s) center control panel." to select a screen (L: left rear screen or R: right can be selected from the front center control rear screen). Point the remote control toward panel. The same source can be selected for the selected screen's IR transceiver and con-

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

Switching off the rear screens Rear screen settings1 Zoom 1: Full-screen image, but parts of the Both of rear screens can be switched off from When watching a video file, a pop-up menu can image will not be viewable. the front center control panel. This function can be displayed by pressing on the remote Zoom 2: Full-screen image, but the aspect be activated under RSE settings Display control. The content of this menu will vary, ratio will be slightly distorted. off as explained in points 2-4 in the sec- depending on the what is being played/viewed. tion "Selecting a source for the rear screens Unless otherwise indicated, the aspect ratio from the front center control panel" on page Day/Night mode will be Normal. 244. The screens can be set for three different light- Press on the remote control and change ing conditions: , or . Press one of the remote control's number keys Auto Day Night the setting under Aspect ratio on the screen. (0 - 9) to switch the screens on again. The Press on the remote control and change See also page 247 for additional information screens will also be switched on when the igni- the setting under Day/Night mode on the about the RSE menus. tion is switched on. screen. See also page 247 for additional infor- Source menu mation about the RSE menus. Disabling the remote control (front) The content of each source's pop-up menu will The IR transceiver for the front screen can be vary, depending on what is being played/ Image settings 05 switched off, which means that the remote Screen settings can be made for brightness, viewed, for example: Disc menu or USB control cannot be used on the front screen. contrast, tint and color. menu. See also page 247 for additional infor- This function can be activated under RSE mation about the RSE menus. settings Disable remote control (front) as Press on the remote control and change DVD menu2 explained in points 2-4 in the section "Select- the setting under Image settings on the If a DVD video is being viewed, this selection ing a source for the rear screens from the front screen. See also page 247 for additional infor- will appear in the pop-up menu. See also page center control panel" on page 244. mation about the RSE menus. 247 for additional information about the RSE Screen aspect ratio menus. Three screen aspect ratios can be set: Normal, Zoom 1 and Zoom 2. Normal: The image on the screen is presented at the normal aspect ratio (usually 4:3 or 16:9).

1 Applies only when watching video files. 2 Applies only to video DVDs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

Rear screen menu settings Music, video and radio Playback and navigating in playlists See also page 247 for additional information Navigate using the remote control's scroll Listening to music about the RSE menus. wheel (see the illustration on page 250) to Music from disc tracks/audio files can be select the desired playlist or folder structure. Random3 played through the media player's USB/AUX Use to confirm the choice of a sub-folder sockets or from streaming audio files coming See page 220 for additional information. or to begin playing the selected track/audio file. from a Bluetooth -connected cell phone. Tracks/audio files can also be played by press- Repeat folder4 For more information about the media player, ing on the remote control and change See page 221 for additional information. see page 221, see page 223 for information tracks/audio files by pressing / . about the AUX/USB sockets and see page DivX Video On Demand Stop playback by pressing . The media player can be registered to play 226 for information about Bluetooth media. See page 221 for more information about the DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select media player. USB. The registration code can be found by CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the pressing the MY CAR button, and going to right screen. Watching a video 05 Settings Information DivX® VOD 2. Use the remote control's button to Video tracks/files can be viewed via the vehi- code. Go to www.divx.com/vod for additional select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front cle's media player or the USB socket. information. screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the For more information about the media player, remote control toward a screen's IR trans- USB hub see page 221 or page 223 for information about ceiver and press one or more times A USB hub can be connected to the USB the USB socket. to come to the desired source (Disc, socket (see page 225 for additional informa- USB, AUX, etc.), release the button and 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select tion). wait several seconds for your selection to CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the be accepted. right screen. 3. Insert a CD in the infotainment system's 2. Use the remote control's button to media player, or connect an external select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front device to the vehicle's USB/AUX sockets screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the or via Bluetooth. remote control toward a screen's IR transceiver and press one or more times

3 Applies to CD audio, CDs/DVDs, USB and iPod. 4 Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only.

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

to select the desired source (Disc or 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select RSE front screen menus USB), release the button and wait several CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the To access this menu, begin by selecting RSE seconds for your selection to be accepted. right screen. under MEDIA by pressing this button on the 3. Insert a DVD in the infotainment system's 2. Point the remote control toward a screen's front center console (or by using the remote media player, or connect an external IR transceiver and press one or more control or the steering wheel keypad). Continue device to the vehicle's USB socket. times to come to the desired source (AM, by pressing OK/MENU to access the menu. Playback and navigation FM1, Sirius1*, etc.), release the button Turn TUNE to the desired selection and con- Play a video track/video file by pressing and wait several seconds for your selection firm by pressing OK/MENU. to be accepted. on the remote control and change tracks/video Settings can be made for the left or right rear files by pressing / . Stop playback 3. Select a station using one of the preset screen separately or for both screens (Left buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or by pressing . See page 220 for more RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen press / to search for the next/ information about playback and navigation on menu and Both RSE screen menus): previous available station. video DVDs and page 221 for information about playing video files. See page 210 for more information about the Power off/Power on radio. Fast forward/reverse RADIO 05 Press and hold the / buttons to fast MEDIA RSE menus forward/reverse. Fast forward/reverse can be RSE settings done at several speeds for video files by briefly Introduction Mute pressing these buttons to increase the speed. Settings in the RSE menus can be made from Fast forward/reverse is done at one speed for the front center console control panel or by Display off audio files. Stop fast forward/reverse by press- using the remote control in the rear seat. A Disable remote control (front) ing , or the / buttons. source for one of the rear screens can be activated from the front center control panel and Reset all RSE settings Listening to the radio certain settings for the rear screens can also be You can also listen to the infotainment sys- made from this panel. tem's radio through the RSE system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

RSE pop-up menu5 The menus for AM, FM1, FM2, Sirius1* and Reset all CD/DVD settings Sirius2* are: Press on the remote control while a video RSE DVD Video menu file is playing to display the pop-up menu. Use Day/Night mode Disc menu the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote to make menu selections. See page 250 for Display off DVD disc menu detailed information about the remote control. Reset all RSE settings Subtitles Audio tracks Screen aspect ration MEDIA Image settings Advanced settings Day/Night mode RSE CD Audio menu Day/Night mode Disc menu Source menu6 Display off Random DVD disc menu7 Reset all DVD settings Day/Night mode RSE USB menu 05 Display off RSE rear screen menus USB menu Reset all CD settings Press on the remote control when a Random source (e.g., Disc) has been selected to access RSE CD/DVD Data menu Repeat folder the RSE-menus for the rear screens. Disc menu DivX® VOD code Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the Random Select USB device remote to make menu selections. See page Repeat folder 250 for detailed information about the remote Day/Night mode DivX® VOD code control. Display off Day/Night mode RADIO Reset all USB settings Display off

5 Applies only when a video file is playing. 6 The content of the menu will vary according to what is being played, for example Disc menu or USB menu. 7 Applies to DVD videos only

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)*

RSE AUX menu Display off AUX menu Reset all Bluetooth settings AUX input volume Day/Night mode Display off Reset all AUX settings

RSE A/V-AUX menu A/V AUX menu A/V AUX input volume Day/Night mode Display off Reset all A/V-AUX settings 05

RSE iPod menu iPod menu Random Day/Night mode Display off Reset all iPod settings

RSE Bluetooth menu Bluetooth menu Random Day/Night mode

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 05 Infotainment

Remote control*

Remote control1 NOTE The remote control included with the Rear Seat Avoid exposing the remote control to strong Entertainment system (RSE)* can be used to sunlight, for instance by leaving it on the control all of the infotainment system's func- dashboard. This could cause problems with tions. its batteries. To use the remote, begin by pressing its button to select a screen (L: left rear Button Function screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen). Continue by pointing the remote toward the Select a screen (L: left rear), (F: selected rear screen's IR transceiver (see the front) or (R: right rear) illustration on page 241) or to the front screen's Switch to the optional Volvo Nav- IR transceiver located to the right of the INFO igation system button on the center console (see page 207 for the location of this button). Select one of the infotainment 05 To control one of the rear RSE screens, select system's radio wavebands (AM, L (left)/R (right) using the remote's but- FM1, etc.) ton. Continue by pointing the remote at the Select one of the infotainment selected screen's IR transceiver (see the illus- system's sources (Disc, USB, tration on page 241 for its location). etc.)

WARNING Select the Bluetooth hands-free feature To help avoid the risk of injuries in the event of sudden braking or a collision, always Fast reverse, change tracks/ stow loose objects such as the remote con- songs trol, cell phones, cameras, etc. in the glove compartment or other storage compart- Play/pause ments when not in use.

The scroll wheel has the same function as TUNE in the center console control panel. 1 Vehicles with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment system only.

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment

Remote control*

Button Function Button Function It is advisable to have extra batteries on long trips. Stop One-button access to frequently used functions (which must be Fast forward, change tracks/ programmed into the button, see songs page 207)

DVD menu Information about the current film, song, etc., or to display information not currently shown Go back one step in a menu, can- on the screen cel a function or delete entered characters Select language for audio tracks

Navigate up/down Subtitles, select subtitle language 1. Press down on the battery cover and slide 05 Navigate right/left it in the direction indicated in the illustra- Not in use tion. Confirm a selection or go to the 2. Remove the old batteries and insert new current source's main menu Replacing batteries ones in the directions indicated by the Reduce volume The remote control runs on four AA/LR6 bat- symbols in the battery holder. teries. 3. Slide the cover back into place. Increase volume Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an NOTE environmentally responsible manner. 0-9 Use to select preset channels or The batteries' normal service life ranges enter characters from 1-4 years, depending on how often the remote is used. If the remote is not working properly, try replacing the four AA/LR6 batteries.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

Navigating in the menus TEL RADIO menus Infotainment settings are made via the sys- TUNE Main AM menu tem's menus. Press one of the mode buttons AM menu (RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL—see the illustration OK/MENU on page 202) to select it and access its specific Show presets menus. When a mode has been selected, press Search paths Scan OK/MENU to access its menus. Throughout this manual, search paths to the Audio settings1 Menu selections can be made using the con- menu system functions are listed as shown in trols in the center console and certain functions the following example: Audio settings Sound stage can also be controlled from the steering wheel Equalizer, if the following steps have been Equalizer keypad. Each mode is described in its respec- taken first: tive section. 1. Press the desired mode button, (RADIO, Volume compensation MEDIA, etc). Continue pressing the button Controls in the center console Reset all audio settings to navigate through the various selections 05 displayed (e.g., FM1). Release the button Main FM1/FM2 menu and wait several seconds to automatically FM menu accept the selection or turn TUNE and press OK/MENU. Show radio text 2. Turn TUNE or use the thumb wheel on the Show presets steering wheel keypad to scroll to the Scan desired menu selection, such as Audio Advanced settings settings, and press OK/MENU to confirm a selection. Reset all FM settings 3. Turn TUNE again to scroll to the desired Audio settings1 submenu (e.g., Equalizer) where applica- RADIO ble and press OK/MENU. MEDIA

1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

252 05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

Main Sirius1*/Sirius2* menu Lock options Change audio track Sirius1 Channel lock list Scan SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button Unlock all channels Audio settings1 to activate SIRIUS. Temporarily unlock all chan- Sirius2 nels Main DVD Video menu Disc menu SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button Change code to activate SIRIUS. DVD disc menu Audio settings1 Song memory Play/Pause/Continue Add song Stop MEDIA menus Song Seek Subtitles Main CD Audio menu Delete song Audio tracks Disc menu View song memory Advanced settings Random 05 Channel list information Angle Scan Station name DivX® VOD code Audio settings1 Artist Audio settings1 Title Main CD/DVD Data menu Main iPod menu Information Disc menu iPod menu Show presets Play/Pause Random Category list Stop Scan Advanced SIRIUS settings Random Audio settings1 Skip options Repeat folder Channel skip list Change subtitles

1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 05 Infotainment

Infotainment system menus

Main USB menu Main AUX menu Change phone USB menu AUX menu Remove Bluetooth device Play/Pause AUX input volume Phone settings 1 Stop Audio settings Discoverable Random Sounds and volume Repeat folder TEL menus Download phone book Select USB device Main Bluetooth hands-free menu Bluetooth software version in Change subtitles Phone menu car Change audio track Call lists Call options Scan All calls Auto answer Audio settings1 Missed calls Voicemail number 05 Answered calls Disconnect phone Main Bluetooth media menu Dialed calls Bluetooth menu Call duration Random Phone book Change device Search Remove Bluetooth device New contact Scan Speed dials Bluetooth software version in car Receive vCard Audio settings1 Memory status Clear phone book

1 The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes

254 05 Infotainment

255 Driving recommendations...... 258 Refueling...... 262 Loading...... 267 Towing a trailer...... 270 Emergency towing...... 273

256 DURING YOUR TRIP 06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

General information • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or WARNING ice has ended. Economical driving conserves natural Driving with the trunk open: Driving with • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, the trunk open could lead to poisonous resources increase air resistance and also fuel con- Better driving economy may be obtained by exhaust gases entering the passenger com- sumption. partment. If the trunk must be kept open for thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- any reason, proceed as follows: and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to • tion will be lower with the air conditioning • Close the windows immediate traffic conditions. on and the windows closed than with the Set the ventilation system control to air Observe the following rules: air conditioning off and the windows open. • flow to floor, windshield and side win- • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel dows and the blower control to its high- perature as soon as possible by driving consumption modes can help you learn est setting. with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for how to drive more economically. the first few minutes of operation. A cold Other factors that decrease gas mileage Weight distribution affects handling engine uses more fuel and is subject to are: increased wear. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a • Dirty air cleaner tendency to understeer, which means that the • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle steering wheel has to be turned more than for driving short distances. This does not • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter might seem appropriate for the curvature of a allow the engine to reach normal operating Dragging brakes • bend. This ensures good stability and reduces temperature. Incorrect front end alignment 06 • the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that • Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration Some of the above mentioned items and others these properties can alter with the vehicle load. and hard braking. are checked at the standard maintenance The heavier the load in the trunk, the less the • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position intervals. tendency to understeer. as often as possible and avoid using kick- down. Handling, roadholding • Do not exceed posted speed limits. Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra that the tires are inflated to the recommended load) in the vehicle. pressure according to the vehicle load. See the • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- pressure regularly (when tires are cold). tributed so that capacity weight or maximum permissible axle loads are not exceeded.

258 06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Driving through water CAUTION WARNING • The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), • Engine damage will occur if water is The cooling fan may start or continue to at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). drawn into the air cleaner. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • Take particular care when driving through • If the vehicle is driven through water flowing water. deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may enter the differential and the transmis- • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of • Clean the electrical connections for trailer sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating the grille when driving in hot weather con- wiring after driving in mud or water. capacity and may shorten the service ditions. • When driving through water, maintain low life of these components. • Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm speed and do not stop in the water. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil water up to the door sills longer than temperature could become too high. WARNING absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. Conserving electrical current After driving through water, press lightly on Keep the following in mind to help minimize the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes If the engine has been stopped while the • battery drain: are functioning normally. Water or mud can vehicle is in water, do not attempt to make the brake linings slippery, resulting in restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of • When the engine is not running, avoid delayed braking effect. the water. using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will 06 Engine and cooling system function in ignition modes 0 and I. These Under special conditions, for example when modes reduce drain on the battery. driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and • Please keep in mind that using systems, cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not run- lows to avoid overheating the engine. ning could result in the battery being com- • Maintain a low speed when driving with a pletely drained. Driving or having the trailer up long, steep hills. engine running for approximately • Do not turn the engine off immediately 15 minutes will help keep the battery when stopping after a hard drive. charged.

259 06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

Before a long distance trip • Consider your destination. If you will be NOTE It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving through an area where snow or ice checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- are likely to occur, consider snow tires. Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance inter- ice technician before driving long distances. Cold weather precautions vals except at owner request and at addi- Your retailer will also be able to supply you with If you wish to check your vehicle before the tional charge. bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for approach of cold weather, the following advice your use in the event that problems occur. is worth noting: • The load placed on the battery is greater As a minimum, the following items should be during the winter since the windshield wip- Make sure that the engine coolant contains checked before any long trip: • ers, lighting, etc. are used more often. 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture Moreover, the capacity of the battery • Check that engine runs smoothly and that will reduce freeze protection. This gives decreases as the temperature drops. In fuel consumption is normal. protection against freezing down to very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" anti- • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- freeze is not approved by Volvo. Different fore advisable to check the state of charge • Have the transmission oil level checked. types of antifreeze must not be mixed. • Check condition of drive belts. more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil • Volvo recommends using only genuine on the battery posts. • Check state of the battery's charge. Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this on all four wheels for winter driving, see well), and replace those that are worn. helps prevent the formation of condensa- page 290. Check tire pressures. tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely 06 To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to • • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and freezing, add washer solvents containing add fuel line de-icer before refueling. steering gear should be checked by a antifreeze. This is important since dirt is trained and qualified Volvo service techni- • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. often splashed on the windshield during cian only. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves winter driving, requiring the frequent use of • Check all lights, including high beams. cold-weather starting as well as decreas- the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer ing fuel consumption while the engine is Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down • Reflective warning triangles are legally warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par- required in some states/provinces. to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and ticularly the synthetic type, is recom- 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part • Have a word with a trained and qualified mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to Volvo service technician if you intend to do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and drive in countries where it may be difficult or in warm weather, see page 347 for more to obtain the correct fuel. information on engine oil.

260 06 During your trip

Driving recommendations

2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks.

261 06 During your trip

Refueling

Fuel requirements ness of the emission control system and could sonal air quality standards, some areas require result in loss of emission warranty coverage. the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Deposit control gasoline (detergent State and local vehicle inspection programs Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygen- additives) will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- ated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- on page 263 must still be met. oline to control engine deposits. Detergent fueled vehicles. gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and Alcohol – Ethanol intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit NOTE Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume control gasolines will help ensure good driva- may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". an octane enhancing additive called methyl- whether the gasoline contains deposit control cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to additives, check with the service station oper- (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission 15% MTBE may be used. ator. Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- Methanol NOTE tion indicator light) located on your instru- Do not use gasolines containing methanol ment panel may light. If this occurs, please (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of exter- return your vehicle to a trained and qualified nal fuel injector cleaning systems. Volvo service technician for service. can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, 06 the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter "Oxygenated fuels" and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective-

262 06 During your trip

Refueling

Octane rating change gasoline brands to fully utilize your Use of Additives engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- With the exception of gas line antifreeze during Minimum octane sible operation. winter months, do not add solvents, thicken- ers, or other store-bought additives to your NOTE vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile sary to fill the tank more than once before a chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself difference in engine operation is noticeable. to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a Never carry a cell phone that is switched knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone G028920 Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- rings, this may cause a spark that could trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and Typical pump octane label injury. strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. WARNING not affect engine reliability. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, 06 Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated where you must fill your own gas tank, take and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per- precautions. These may include: gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes formance using premium 91 octane fuel. inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle compartment is ventilated, and immediately Demanding driving while refueling return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- • refueling only at gas stations with vapor Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

263 06 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler door tral locking button does not lock the fuel Manually opening the fuel filler door filler door. • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling. • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed.

CAUTION Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling.

• G024631 In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing The fuel filler door is located on the right rear If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened alcohol can cause damage to painted fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel manually: surfaces, which may not be covered tank symbol on the information display ) under the New Vehicle Limited War- 1. Open the side hatch in the trunk (on the ranty. With the ignition switched off, press and same side as the fuel filler door). release the button on the lighting panel to 2. Grasp the green cord with a handle. 06 unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the the fuel filler door clicks open. vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/trunk while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. • You can also keep the vehicle locked if you remain inside it during refueling. The cen-

264 06 During your trip

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel cap CAUTION avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. 2 • Do not refuel with the engine running . • Do not park your vehicle over combustible Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the materials, such as grass or leaves, which ignition is on, an incorrect reading could can come into contact with the hot exhaust occur in the fuel gauge. system and cause such materials to ignite • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not under certain wind and weather condi- press the handle on the filler nozzle tions. more than one extra time. Too much fuel • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of in the tank in hot weather conditions can one minute), or an intermittently firing or cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling flooded engine can cause three-way cata- could also cause damage to the emis- lytic converter or exhaust system over- G022915 sion control systems. heating. Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the • Remember that tampering or unauthorized filler cap slowly. Emission controls modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turn- Three-way catalytic converter gal and can cause three-way catalytic con- ing it clockwise until it clicks into place. • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain verter or exhaust system overheating. This engine malfunctions, particularly involving includes: altering fuel injection settings or the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition components, altering emission system 06 systems, may cause unusually high three- components or location or removing com- way catalytic converter temperatures. Do ponents, and/or repeated use of leaded not continue to operate your vehicle if you fuel. detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating condi- NOTE tions, such as engine overheating or back- firing. A properly tuned engine will help Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters.

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

265 06 During your trip

Refueling

Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- tion to help reduce harmful emissions.

266 06 During your trip

Introduction WARNING Load anchoring eyelets The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector in determined by factors such as the number of • P, and apply the parking brake when passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight loading or unloading long objects. of any accessories that may be installed, etc. • The vehicle's driving characteristics To increase loading space, the rear seat back- may change depending on the weight rests can be folded down, see page 85. and distribution of the load. When loading the trunk, keep the following in • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). The trunk lid can be unlocked an pop- • The rear seat should not be loaded to a

ped open slightly via the button G021462 located on the lighting panel, see page 64. level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. • Load objects in the trunk against the back- Objects placed higher than this level The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the rest whenever possible. could impede the function of the Volvo vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help • Unstable loads can be secured to the load Inflatable Curtain. anchor items in the trunk. anchoring eyelets with straps or web lash- ings to help keep them from shifting. Folding down the rear seat backrests • Stop the engine and apply the parking 06 brake when loading or unloading long The rear seat backrests can be folded down for objects. The gear selector can be knocked additional loading space, see page 86. out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion.

267 06 During your trip

WARNING The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place. • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the trunk. load to help prevent shifting during sud- 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. den stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects Ski hatch with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden There is a hatch in the right section of the rear stops. seat backrest that can be opened for transportation. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P Fold the right backrest forward. when loading and unloading the vehicle. Release the hatch in the rear seat backrest by sliding the catch up while folding the Grocery bag holder* hatch forward. Return the backrest to the upright position 06 with the hatch open. Use the seat belt to prevent the load from moving. G021463

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the trunk

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 During your trip

WARNING Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle. Always secure the load to help prevent • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are it from moving in the event of sudden • designed to carry the maximum allowable braking. roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). • Switch off the engine, apply the parking For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- brake and put the gear selector in P ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. when loading and unloading the vehicle. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- The cover on the rear seat armrest/child seat mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). has no hinge. The cover must be removed • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads before the ski hatch is used. evenly. Removal: • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. Open the cover 30 degrees and lift straight up. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. Installation: • Check periodically that the load carriers Insert the cover in the grooves behind the and load are properly secured. upholstery and close the cover. • Remember that the vehicle's center of 06 gravity and handling change when you Roof loads carry a load on the roof. • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel con- Using load carriers sumption will increase with the size of the Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- load. ries. Observe the following points when in use: • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to cornering and hard braking. achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that

269 06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

Introduction when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- Bumper-attached trailer hitches must hitches that are specially designed for the vehi- ditioner if the temperature gauge needle • not be used on Volvos, nor should cle. enters the red range. safety chains be attached to the If the automatic transmission begins to • bumper. NOTE overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle See page 345 for the maximum trailer and rear axle must not be used. Avoid overload and other abusive opera- tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • tion. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- Observe the legal requirements of the • brake system, nor a trailer's lighting • ity, and economy. state/province in which the vehicles are system directly to the vehicle lighting It is necessary to balance trailer brakes All Volvo models are equipped with • system. Consult your nearest author- • with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- safe stop (check and observe state/local ers. Trailer hitch installation should not tion. regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system wire must be correctly fastened to the directly to the vehicle's brake system. Trailer towing does not normally present any hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch particular problems, but take into considera- • More frequent vehicle maintenance is on the vehicle. The safety wire should never be fastened to or wound around 06 tion: required. the drawbar ball. Remove the ball holder when the hitch is Increase tire pressure to recommended full • • not being used. pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 283. • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic engine oil when towing a trailer over long When your vehicle is new, avoid towing • distances or in mountainous areas. heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched

270 06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

NOTE Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end putting the gear selector in P. Always of the locking bolt. follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt C • When starting on a hill, put the gear and slide the locking bolt out of the ball selector in D before releasing the park- holder/hitch assembly. ing brake. See also page 120 for more detailed information about starting off D 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem- E on a hill while towing a trailer. B bly.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift A G010496 positions while towing a trailer, make NOTE Ball holder sure the gear you select does not put A cover for the hitch assembly is also too much strain on the engine (using too Locking bolt included in the kit. high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may Cotter pin be rated for trailers heavier than the Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Hitch assembly vehicle is designed to tow. Please Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to 06 adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer Safety wire attachment help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer weights. when the vehicle and trailer have begun to • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of Installing the ball holder sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and more than 15 %. 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from Traction Control system (DSTC). See page the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt 144 for information on DSTC. out of the hitch assembly. Trailer cable Function An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has bly. various reasons. Normally this only occurs at 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on in the hitch assembly. overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed the ground. in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds

271 06 During your trip

Towing a trailer

between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/ movement. If the system detects a tendency to h). sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on Swaying may be caused by factors such as: the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, enable the driver to regain control of the vehi- strong crosswind cle. • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an If this is not adequate to stop the swaying uneven road surface or drive over a bump motion, the brakes are applied to all of the • Sudden movements of the steering wheel wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is Facts about TSA temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion • TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have mately 40 mph (60 km/h) once again become stable, TSA will no stop • The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instru- regulating the brakes/engine power and the ment panel will flash when TSA is working driver regains control of the vehicle. • If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started) 06 • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly How TSA works Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral

272 06 During your trip

Emergency towing

Towing eyelet • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, CAUTION etc., into the notch and pry open the edge of the cover. Open the cover com- If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed pletely and remove it. truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed. • If the cover has a mark along one edge or in a corner, press the mark while pry- ing out the opposite side/corner using a WARNING coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it. • Remember that the power brakes and Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand power steering will not function when G021500 and then using the tire iron until it is securely in engine is not running. The braking and place. steering systems will function but considerably higher pressure will be After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet required on the brake pedal and greater should be removed and returned to its storage steering effort must be exerted. location. • The towing eyelets must not be used for Press the cover for the attachment point back pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for into position. any similar purpose involving severe strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to NOTE pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. 06 Attaching the towing eyelet On certain models equipped with a trailer hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed Attaching the towing eyelet into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing Precautions when the vehicle is being The towing eyelet is located under the floor rope should be attached to the trailer hitch towed instead. For this reason, the detachable of the trunk, with the spare tire. This eyelet Attach jumper cables (see page 111) to section of the trailer hitch should be safely • must be screwed into the positions provi- stowed in the vehicle at all times. provide current for releasing the electric ded on the right sides of either the front or parking brake and to move the gear selec- rear bumper (see illustration). tor from the P position to N. There are two different types of covers over • Be sure that the steering wheel lock is the openings for the towing eyelet and they released (see page 88). have to be opened differently. • While the vehicle is being towed, set the ignition in mode II if the battery is not

273 06 During your trip

Emergency towing

drained so that the headlights/taillights can CAUTION please refer to the towing information on be switched on. See page 80 for informa- page 273. tion on the ignition modes. • Please check with state and local authorities before attempting this type Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not CAUTION • of towing, as vehicles being towed are exceed the maximum allowable towing subject to regulations regarding maxi- Sling-type equipment applied at the speed. • mum towing speed, length and type of front will damage radiator and air con- • Maximum distance with front wheels on towing device, lighting, etc. ditioning lines. ground: 50 miles (80 km). • If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not • It is equally important not to use sling- • While the vehicle is being towed, try to attempt to start the vehicle by pushing type equipment at the rear or apply lift- keep the tow rope taut at all times. or pulling it as this will damage the ing equipment inside the rear wheels; • The vehicle should only be towed in the three-way catalytic converter(s). The serious damage to the rear axle may forward direction. engine must be jump started using an result. auxiliary battery (see page 111). • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed CAUTION • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator. front wheels off the ground should not be towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km). bed. Consult the tow truck operator. 06 Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/ All Wheel Drive Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment. • If wheel lift equipment must be used, please use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. • If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground,

274 06 During your trip

275 General information ...... 278 Tire inflation...... 281 Inflation pressure ...... 283 Tire designations ...... 284 Glossary of tire terminology ...... 286 Vehicle loading ...... 287 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...... 289 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ...... 290 Temporary Spare ...... 291 Tire Sealing System...... 292 Changing a wheel ...... 298 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)...... 301

276 WHEELS AND TIRES 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction without the "all-season" rating. However, for Tire age Your vehicle is equipped with tires according optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered Tires degrade over time, even when they are to the vehicle's tire information placard on the roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on not being used. It is recommended that tires B-pillar (the structural member at the side of all four wheels. generally be replaced after 6 years of normal the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent opening). are the same size designation, type (radial) and high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) preferably from the same manufacturer, on all exposure can accelerate the aging process. 1 CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering The temporary spare should also be replaced the car's roadholding and handling characte- at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been Some Volvo models are equipped with an used. Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. bination designed to provide maximum dry A tire's age can be determined by the DOT pavement performance with consideration New Tires stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). for hydroplaning resistance. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration and, depending on driving conditions, may should be replaced immediately. achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped Improving tire economy with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC sys- • Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire tem, these tires are not designed for winter inflation table on page 283. driving, and should be replaced with winter Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard tires when weather conditions dictate. • braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. 07 surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these fea- Remember that tires are perishable goods. As • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. of 2000, the manufacturing week and year and driving comfort. (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) Most models are equipped with "all-season" • Tires must maintain the same direction of will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means rotation throughout their lifetime. tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree that the tire illustrated was manufactured dur- of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires ing week 15 of 2010).

1 Option or accessory on some models

278 07 Wheels and tires

General information

• When replacing tires, the tires with the • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's WARNING most tread should be mounted on the rear braking properties and ability to force wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer aside rain, snow and slush. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability during hard braking. The tires with the most tread should always • and handling requirements. Unap- Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- • proved wheel/tire size combinations tires and/or wheels permanently. ding). can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- Contact a Volvo workshop if you are Summer and winter tires • bility and handling. unsure about the tread depth. • Any damage caused by installation of Storing wheels and tires unapproved wheel/tire size combina- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted tions will not be covered by your new on rims), they should be suspended off the vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no floor or placed on their sides on the floor. responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on installations. their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. Tire wear CAUTION

G021778 Tire rotation Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the dry, dark place, and should never be stored wear is affected by a number of factors such tire in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving etc. • When switching between summer and style, etc. winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., 07 LF = left front, RR = right rear • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall.

279 07 Wheels and tires

General information

NOTE are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the • If the tires are rotated, they should only tread, these strips become visible and indicate be moved from front to rear or vice that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less versa. They should never be rotated left than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- to right/right to left. tion. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 When replacing worn tires, it is recommended miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the customers find that tire rotation may same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- help to get extra mileage from tire life. tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. • Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Tread wear indicator

07 G021829

The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI

280 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation placard NOTE WARNING • The placards shown indicate inflation • Under-inflation is the most common pressure for the tires installed on the cause of tire failure and may result in vehicle at the factory only. severe tire cracking, tread separation, • A certain amount of air seepage from or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- vehicle control and increased risk of sure fluctuates with seasonal changes injury. in temperature. Always check tire pres- • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- sure regularly. rying capacity of your vehicle.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation When weather temperature changes occur, tire G032521 pressure, including the spare, at least once inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree Tire inflation placard a month and before long trips. You are temperature drop causes a corresponding strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pres- drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check Tire inflation sure gauge, as automatic service station your tire pressures frequently and adjust them Check tire inflation pressure regularly. gauges may be inaccurate. to the proper pressure, which can be found on See the tire inflation table on page 283. A tire • Use the recommended cold inflation pres- the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi- inflation pressure placard is also located on the sure for optimum tire performance and cation label. wear. driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at Checking tire pressure the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause door opening). This placard indicates the des- uneven treadwear patterns. Cold tires ignation of the factory-mounted tires on your Inflation pressure should be checked when the vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pres- tires are cold. 07 sure. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

281 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

After driving a distance of approximately 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- Speed ratings 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be ing the spare. hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis- W 168 mph (270 km/h) tance to pump your tire(s), check and record NOTE the tire pressure first and add the appropriate Y 186 mph (300 km/h) air pressure when you get to the pump. • If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center Load ratings If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, of the valve. Then recheck the pressure See page 284 for an explanation of the load never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires with your tire gauge. rating on the sidewall of the tire. are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- • Some spare tires require higher inflation sures to increase above recommended cold pressure than the other tires. Consult pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended the tire inflation pressure table on page cold inflation pressure could be significantly 283 or see the inflation pressure plac- under-inflated. ard. To check inflation pressure: 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the Tire ratings valve. Speed ratings 2. Add air to reach the recommended air The speed ratings in the table translate as fol- pressure. low: 3. Replace the valve cap. Speed ratings 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded M 81 mph (130 km/h) 07 that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. Q 100 mph (160 km/h) 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are T 118 mph (190 km/h) no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- ities. H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h)

282 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 281 for its location) for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Front Rear psi/kPa psi/kPa

225/50 R17 36/250 36/250 245/40 R18

Temporary spare tire 61/420 61/420

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

283 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Information on the sidewall 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season 5 6 7 9 8 larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all federal 4 3. R: Radial tire. standards. The next two numbers or letters 10 are the plant code where it was manufac- 3 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in tured, the next two are the tire size code inches). and the last four numbers represent the 2 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a 11 week and year the tire was built. For exam- 1 load index of 95 equals a maximum load of ple, 1510 means that the tire was manu- 12 1521 lbs (690 kg). factured during week 15 of 2010. The num- G010753 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum bers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This infor- Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers speed at which the tire is designed to be mation helps a tire manufacturer identify a place standardized information on the sidewall driven for extended periods of time, carry- tire for safety recall purposes. of all tires (see the illustration). ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For exam- 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material The following information is listed on the tire ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- sidewall: (210 km/h). cates or the number of layers of rubber- The tire designation: coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. NOTE Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, NOTE The tire's load index and speed rating may which include steel, nylon, polyester, and not appear on the sidewall because they are Please be aware that the following tire des- others. 07 ignation is an example only and that this not required by law. particular tire may not be available on your 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum vehicle. load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

284 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: see page 289 for more information. 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer.

285 07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terms • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. chapter. ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the side • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be radial tubeless, etc. of the vehicle behind the front door. cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. perature is normally reached after the vehi- showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- eter of the tire that contacts the road when ber on the sidewall of each tire providing mounted on the vehicle. information about the tire brand and man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- a tire and tube assembly upon which the ufacturer. tire beads are seated. : A measure of the • Inflation pressure • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- grams that can be carried by the tire. This ric tires designed to carry a maximum load rating is established by the tire manufac- at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. turer. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond • Maximum permissible inflation this pressure will not increase the tires load pressure: the greatest amount of air pres- carrying capability. sure that should ever be put in the tire. This • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric limit is set by the tire manufacturer. 07 tires designed to carry a heavier maximum • Recommended tire inflation pressure: load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric inflation pressure, established by Volvo, tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure which is based on the type of tires that are beyond this pressure will not increase the mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This tire's load carrying capability. information can be found on the tire infla- • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side sure.

286 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loads Permissible axle weight 2. Determine the combined weight of the Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- The maximum allowable weight that can be driver and passengers that will be riding in mum return of vehicle design performance. carried by a single axle (front or rear). These your vehicle. numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ with the following terms for determining your and passengers from XXX kilograms or CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must XXX pounds. vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a never exceed its maximum permissible weight. trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 4. The resulting figure equals the available Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ Gross vehicle weight (GVW) amount of cargo and luggage load CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount tion placard: gers. equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the Curb weight amount of available cargo and luggage The weight of the vehicle including a full tank NOTE load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not • The location of the various labels in your (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- vehicle can be found on page 342. ment. • A table listing important weight limits for 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage your vehicle can be found on page and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Capacity weight 345. That weight may not safely exceed the All weight added to the curb weight, including available cargo and luggage load capacity cargo and optional equipment. When towing, calculated in Step 4. trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Steps for Determining Correct Load 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load weight. Limit from your trailer will be transferred to your 1. Locate the statement "the combined vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine NOTE weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- how this reduces the available cargo and 07 For trailer towing information, please refer to cle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. the section "Towing a trailer" on page 270.

1 See page 270.

287 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

288 07 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grading information may have poor traction performance. The trac- WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST tion grade assigned to this tire is based on The temperature grade for this tire is estab- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. lished for a tire that is properly inflated and REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- GRADES inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- WARNING rately or in combination, can cause heat Quality grades can be found, where appli- buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread The traction grade assigned to this tire is shoulder and maximum section width. For based on braking (straight-ahead) traction example: tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR TEMPERATURE The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested and C, representing the tire's resistance to the under controlled conditions on a specified gov- generation of heat and its ability to dissipate ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- heat when tested under controlled conditions ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. times as well on the government course as a Sustained high temperature can cause the tire graded 100. The relative performance of material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tires depends upon the actual conditions of tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to their use, however, and many depart signifi- sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds cantly from the norm due to variation in driving to a minimum level of performance that all pas- habits, maintenance practices and differences senger vehicle tires must meet under the Fed- in road characteristics and climate. eral Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B 07 and A represent higher levels of performance TRACTION on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are required by law. AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

289 07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Winter driving conditions CAUTION cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- ure to do so could reduce traction to an Snow chains • Check local regulations regarding the unsafe level or adversely affect handling. use of snow chains before installing. Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with • Do not mix tires of different design as this the following restrictions: • Use single-sided snow chains only. could also negatively affect overall tire road • Snow chains should be installed on front • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and in warm weather. They should be removed • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. when the winter driving season has ended. and wheels are installed and are of a size • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the vehicle should be driven as Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). smoothly as possible to give the studs the brakes, suspension and body components • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns opportunity to seat properly in the tires. must be maintained. when driving with snow chains. The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime. • Some strap-on type chains will interfere • The handling of the vehicle can be with brake components and therefore adversely affected when driving with CANNOT be used. chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains as locked wheel braking. Please consult state or provincial regula- should only be installed on the front tions restricting the use of studded winter wheels. tires before installing such tires. Snow tires, studded tires1 • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. Tires for winter use: 07 • Owners who live in or regularly commute Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow through areas with sustained periods of chain information. snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during

1 Where permitted

290 07 Wheels and tires

Temporary Spare

Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem- porary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire 07 other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

291 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Location Accessing the tire sealing system WARNING The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor of the trunk. To access it: • After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle should not be driven farther than 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. approximately 120 miles (200 km). 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. • Have the tire inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as NOTE soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be • The tire sealing system is only intended replaced. to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the sidewall. • The vehicle should not be driven faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be that has been temporarily repaired with repaired with the tire sealing system. the tire sealing system. Introduction • After use, stow the tire sealing system • After using the tire sealing system, drive properly to help prevent rattling. Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing carefully and avoid abrupt steering system* that enables you to temporarily seal a maneuvers and sudden stops. hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. The system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a 07 hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console and on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat, see page 195.

292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–overview WARNING • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical atten- Please keep the following points in mind tion. when using the tire sealing system: • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol NOTE and natural rubber-latex. These sub- Do not break the seal on the bottle. This stances are harmful if swallowed. occurs automatically when the bottle is • The contents of this bottle may cause screwed into the holder. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Precautions: Speed limit sticker • Keep out of reach of children. Do not ingest the contents. On/Off switch • • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact Electrical wire with the skin. Bottle holder (orange cover) • Hands should be washed thoroughly after handling. Protective hose cover First aid: Air release knob • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention Hose if symptoms occur. 07 Bottle with sealing compound • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the Air pressure gauge upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

293 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Tire sealing system–temporarily NOTE WARNING repairing a flat tire Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Contact with the sealing compound may etc.) from the tire before using the sealing cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash system. the affected area immediately with soap and water. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary. 4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle WARNING of sealing compound. Never leave the tire sealing system • NOTE unattended when it is operating. • Keep the tire sealing system away from Do not break the seal on the bottle. This children. occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. 5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. • Apply the parking brake. WARNING Stage 1: Sealing the hole The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. it securely in place and help prevent sealing

G014338 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- to the steering wheel hub where it will be tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service 07 Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two clearly visible to the driver. stages: technician. 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- sealing compound into the tire. The car is pressed down). then driven a short distance to distribute tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- the sealing compound in the tire. tem’s hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand.

294 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest NOTE 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation 12-volt socket in the vehicle. valve and reinstall the valve cap. The air pressure gauge will temporarily 8. Start the vehicle’s engine. show an increase in pressure to approxi- 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed WARNING pound is being pumped into the tire. The of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- pressure should return to a normal level ing compound in the tire. The vehicle´s engine should be running after approximately 30 seconds. when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle CAUTION 10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to is parked in a well ventilated place, or out- If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch doors, before using the system. Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the off the compressor briefly to get a clear use of the sealing compound may lead to reading from the pressure gauge. 9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare by pressing the on/off switch to position I. cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. CAUTION Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. WARNING The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid • Never stand next to the tire being inflated overheating. NOTE when the compressor is in operation. • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a switch off the compressor immediately. WARNING convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire’s inflation pres- If the pressure remains below 22 psi • If there is visible damage to the sidewall sure. or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, The vehicle should not be driven if this turn off the compressor. In this case, the • The empty bottle of sealing compound occurs. Contact a towing service or hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle cannot be removed from the bottle 07 should not be driven. Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if holder. Consult a trained and qualified applicable. Volvo service technician to have the 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect bottle removed and properly disposed the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. of.

295 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

WARNING Replacing the sealing compound Inflating tires container The tire sealing system can be used to inflate If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be the tires. To do so: replaced if: ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a 1. Park the car in a safe place. safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, the tire sealing system has been used to • 2. The compressor should be switched off. cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure Ensure that the on/off switch is in position is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be and qualified Volvo service technician. pressed down). NOTE 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system tion valve and screw the hose connector bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please onto the valve as tightly as possible by 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this consult your Volvo retailer for replace- hand. ment parts. chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- 12-volt socket in the vehicle. sealing system’s compressor. If neces- ration date has passed, please take it to sary, release air from the tire by turning the a Volvo retailer or a recycling station 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. air release knob counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful substances. WARNING CAUTION • The vehicle’s engine should be running The compressor should not be used for when the tire sealing system is used to 07 more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure overheating. the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system. WARNING • Children should never be left unattended If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 in the vehicle when the engine is running. hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.

296 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached. 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap. 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 07 12-volt socket.

297 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Removing a wheel CAUTION 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool* The vehicle must never be driven with more stowed under the floor of the trunk. than one temporary spare wheel. 3. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel wheel cover by hand. well with the rim side down. There are two foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and one 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground over/inside. The upper one contains all tools. with wooden blocks or large stones. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam blocks.

G014341 Taking out the spare wheel Location of jack and tools 1. Open the floor hatch. Spare wheel 2. Undo the retaining bolt. The spare wheel is only intended for temporary 3. Lift out the foam block. use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as 4. Lift out the spare wheel. possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire The other two blocks can remain in the spare pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire wheel well. pressure table on page 283. After use The foam block and spare wheel must be WARNING replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow 07 Lug wrench and towing eyelet Current legislation prohibits the use of the on the upper foam block. It should point for- “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a tem- ward. 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug porary replacement for a punctured tire. It wrench as shown in the illustration. must be replaced as soon as possible by a Changing a wheel standard tire. Road holding and handling 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear may be affected with the “Temporary selector in P. Spare” in use.

298 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

CAUTION WARNING The towing eyelet must be screwed into the • The jack must correctly engage the jack lug wrench as far as possible. attachment. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- slippery surface. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle

G017465 when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. Jack attachment points • Apply the parking brake and put the 7. There are two jack attachment points on gear selector in the Park (P) position. each side of the vehicle. Position the jack • Block the wheels standing on the correctly in the attachment (see the illus- ground, use rigid wooden blocks or tration) and crank while simultaneously large stones. guiding the base of the jack to the ground. The jack should be kept well-greased The base of the jack must be flat on a level, • and clean, and should not be damaged. firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the the vehicle, check that the jack is still cor- • No objects should be placed between lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the rectly positioned in the attachment. the base of jack and the ground, or wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down- between the jack and the attachment ward (counterclockwise) pressure. 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be bar on the vehicle. changed is lifted off the ground. 07 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and Re-installing the wheel remove the wheel. 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

299 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Tighten the lug nuts 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve. 07

300 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure NOTE er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- warning light will flash for approximately sure, even if under-inflation has not reached 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low required will be displayed. This device complies with part 15 of the tire pressure telltale. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with a cause harmful interference, and (2) this should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when device must accept any interference inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the system is not operating properly. The received, including interference that may by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with cause undesired operation. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your the low tire pressure telltale. When the system vehicle has tires of a different size than the size detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sen- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation approximately one minute and then remain sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- pressure label, you should determine the continuously illuminated. This sequence will tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- As an added safety feature, your vehicle has (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit function indicator is illuminated, the system been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring inflation pressure data to a receiver located in may not be able to detect or signal low tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- the vehicle. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may sure telltale when one or more of your tires is occur for a variety of reasons, including the When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when installation of replacement or alternate tires or will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the should stop and check your tires as soon as from functioning properly. Always check the instrument panel and will display one of the possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one 07 following messages in the text window: Tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to pressure low or tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel Tire needs air now. and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the function properly. vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

1 Not available in all markets or in all models.

301 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE Changing wheels with TPMS CAUTION Please note the following when changing or TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press not replace normal tire maintenance. For the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the information on correct tire pressure, please tires on the vehicle: valve to help avoid bending or otherwise refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this • Only the factory-mounted wheels are damaging the valve. chapter or consult your Volvo retailer. equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary NOTE Erasing warning messages spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS When a low tire pressure warning message has sensor. • If you change to tires with a different recommended inflation pressure, the been displayed, and the tire pressure warning If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- • TPMS system must be recalibrated to light has come on: ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST these tires. On U.S. models, this must SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the be done by a trained and qualified Volvo each time the vehicle is driven above inflation pressure of all four tires. service technician. On Canadian mod- 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure els, see the following section "Recali- • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, (consult the tire pressure placard or the brating TPMS." the warning message should not reappear. If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- inflation pressure table on page 283. If the message is still displayed, drive the • sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a replaced. speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This message. When installing TPMS sensors, the will erase the warning text and the warning Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be • • vehicle must be parked for at least light will go out. fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the Volvo does not recommend moving sen- vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a 07 sors back and forth between sets of WARNING TPMS error message will be displayed. wheels. Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models vehicle. only) In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-

302 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tion pressure table on page 283), for example, 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- if higher inflation pressure is necessary when sole control panel and select Settings transporting heavy loads, etc. Car settings Tire pressure This is done in the vehicle's menu system (see 4. Select Tire pressure system ON/Off and page 128). press OK/MENU. To recalibrate: 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and put the ignition in mode I or II (see page 80 for additional information). 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again. 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at least 1 minute. > When the calibration message is no longer displayed, TPMS has been recalibrated to the new inflation pressure. 07 Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian models only) 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page 80 for additional information).

303 Volvo maintenance...... 306 Maintaining your car...... 307 Hood and engine compartment...... 309 Engine oil...... 310 Fluids...... 312 Replacing bulbs...... 314 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 321 Battery...... 323 Fuses...... 326 Vehicle care...... 334

304 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 08 Maintenance and specifications

Volvo maintenance

Introduction recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance sion maintenance be retained in case ques- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- program outlined in the Warranty and Service tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tenance. The schedule includes components Records Information booklet. This mainte- tion and maintenance should also be per- that affect vehicle emissions. This page nance program contains inspections and serv- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or describes some of the emission-related com- ices necessary for the proper function of your suspected. ponents. vehicle. The maintenance services contain Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada several checks that require special tools and In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- training, and therefore must be performed by a dian regulations, the following list of warranties qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top is provided. condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty manufacturers to furnish written instructions to • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper tems Limited Warranty servicing and function of the components that • Emission Design and Defect Warranty control emissions. These services, which are Emission Performance Warranty listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • Information" booklet, are not covered by the These are the federal warranties; other warran- warranty. You will be required to pay for labor ties are provided as required by state/provin- and material used. cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for Maintenance detailed information concerning each of the Your Volvo passed several major inspections warranties. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Periodic maintenance helps minimize procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- emissions 08 ice Records Information booklet, many of Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- cle running well. Your Warranty and Service sions, should be performed as indicated. It is Records Information booklet provides a com-

306 08 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

Owner maintenance As needed: They are specially reinforced to bear the weight Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup under the front of the engine support frame. and Service Records Information booklet. of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt Take care not to damage the splash guard residues. under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- The following points can be carried out tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at between the normally scheduled maintenance Always use axle stands or similar structures. services. the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect. If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the Each time the car is refueled: front and rear lift arm pads should be centered • Check the engine oil level. NOTE under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, edge of the sill rail (see illustration). • Complete service information for qualified headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. Emission inspection readiness Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect What is an Onboard Diagnostic System the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle (OBD II)? • Check that engine coolant and other fluid OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized levels are between the indicated "min" and engine management system. It stores diagnos- "max" markings. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass controls. It can light the Check Engine light cleaner and soft paper towels. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A • Wipe driver information displays with a soft "fault" is a component or system that is not cloth. performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • store a message about any fault. rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end How do states use OBD II for emission of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo inspections? retailer for additional information. Many states connect a computer directly to a 08 If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can two jack attachments points should be used. then read "faults." In some states, this type of

307 08 Maintenance and specifications

Maintaining your car

inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission way driving is typically needed to allow test. OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more infor- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission mation on planning a trip. inspection? • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- your vehicle's maintenance schedule. tion for any of the following reasons. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your vehicle may fail inspection. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • If you recently had service for a lit Check Engine light, or if you had service that 08 required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high-

308 08 Maintenance and specifications

Hood and engine compartment

Opening and closing the hood Engine compartment, overview WARNING The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off.

WARNING The ignition should always be completely switched off before performing any opera- tions in the engine compartment. The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precau- G018945 tions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when: The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model. • Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc. Coolant expansion tank • Do not touch any part of the distributor Power steering fluid reservoir ignition system while the engine is run- G010951 ning. This may result in unintended Engine oil dipstick movements and body injury. Pull the lever located under the left side of Radiator the dash to release the hood lock. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release Filler cap for engine oil control (located under the right front edge Cover over brake fluid reservoir of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood Battery WARNING Relay and fuse box Check that the hood locks properly when 08 closed. Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner

309 08 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil NOTE The oil level should be checked at regular inter- Before checking the oil: vals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. • The car should be parked on a level surface. • See page 347 for oil specifications. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least • Refer to the Warranty and Service Records 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has Information booklet for information on the been switched off. oil change intervals.

CAUTION

• Not checking the oil level regularly can G021734 result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. Location of the filler cap and dipstick • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Always add oil of the same type and

viscosity as already used. G021737

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX could cause an increase in oil consump- marks on the dipstick tion. Checking the oil Oil changes should be carried out by a • 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- trained and qualified Volvo service tech- free rag. nician. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check 08 the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

310 08 Maintenance and specifications

Engine oil

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

NOTE Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer.

311 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

Coolant CAUTION WARNING • If necessary, top up the cooling system • Never remove the expansion tank cap with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze while the engine is warm. Wait until the only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- engine cools. freeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- Brake fluid freeze. Location of the coolant reservoir • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the Normally, the coolant does not need to be level must be between the MIN and changed. If the system must be drained, con- MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- can be high local temperatures in the nician. engine which could result in damage. See page 349 for information on cooling sys- Check coolant regularly! tem capacities. • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it Location of the brake fluid reservoir should freeze. Checking the level • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the The fluid reservoir is concealed under the vehicle's cooling system. round cover at the rear of the engine compart- 08 ment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed.

312 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fluids

The brake fluid should always be between the 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. WARNING MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- The level must be between the MIN and ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that MAX marks. If a problem should occur in the power there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F Power steering fluid possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep (>280 °C), P/N 9437433 in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel. Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. CAUTION When driving under extremely hard conditions Keep the area around the power steering (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to fluid reservoir clean when checking. replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Check the level frequently. The fluid does not • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark require changing. The fluid level must be in the reservoir or if a brake-related between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- message is shown in the information ties and recommended fluid grade, see display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car page 349. towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid. 08 Filling 1. Turn and open the cover.

313 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Introduction WARNING Headlight housing All bulb specifications are listed on page 320. The engine should not be running when The following bulbs should only be replaced by • changing bulbs. a trained and qualified Volvo service technician: • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight hous- • Dome lighting ing, please keep in mind that compo- • Reading lights nents in the engine compartment will be • Glove compartment lighting hot. • Footwell lighting • Turn signals in the door mirrors WARNING • Approach lighting in the door mirrors • Active Bending Lights* – due to the high • Brake lights voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a • Active Bending Lights and LED bulbs trained and qualified Volvo service tech- See page 320 for a list of bulb specifications. nician. • Turn off the lights and remove the NOTE remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs. G010325 For information regarding any other bulbs not mentioned in this section, please con- The entire headlight housing must be lifted out tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and when replacing all front bulbs. authorized Volvo service technician. CAUTION Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage it. 08

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

NOTE 4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight hous- Removing the cover to access the ing") bulbs • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. Unplug the wiring connector by holding • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs down the clip with your thumb. contain trace amounts of mercury. Pull out the connector with the other These bulbs should always be disposed hand. of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. Removing the headlight housing 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). 1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button. Reinserting the headlight housing 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into G021745 2. Remove the remote key from the ignition place. slot1. 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking NOTE 3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight hous- pins. Check that they are correctly ing") inserted. The headlight housing must be Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 314. Withdraw the headlight housing's lock- properly inserted and secured in place before the lighting is switched on or the ing pins. remote key is inserted into the ignition slot. 1. Open the retaining clamp by pressing it to Pull the headlight housing straight out. the side. 3. Check that the lights function properly. 2. Press down the clips on the upper edge of CAUTION the cover and remove it. When disconnecting the connector, pull on Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. the connector itself and not on the wiring.

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

315 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Low beam, Halogen High beam, Halogen Extra high beam2 G021746 G021747 G021748

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 314). vehicle (see page 314). vehicle (see page 314). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 315). page 315). page 315). 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter- 3. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder clockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder downward. downward. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn 5. Insert a new bulb in the connector until it snaps into place. It can only be secured in it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be snaps in place. It can only be inserted in one position. secured in one position. one way. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight 6. Return the bulb holder into position in the stall the headlight housing. housing. headlight housing. 08 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. stall the headlight housing.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

316 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Parking lights Turn signals Side marker lights

NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 314. G021749 G021750

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 314). vehicle (see page 314). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the round cover by pulling the tab

page 315). until the cover comes off. G021751 3. To access the bulb, first remove the high 3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. beam bulb. 1. Remove the headlight housing from the 4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it vehicle (see page 314). 4. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder. in slightly and turning out before pulling it out. Press a new bulb into the socket. 2. Remove the round cover. 5. Remove the burned out bulb and install a new one. It can only be secured in one 5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and 3. Pull the wire to withdraw the bulb holder. position. press until it clicks into place. 4. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a 6. Press the bulb holder into the socket and 6. Press the cover until it clicks into position. new one. It can only be secured in one press until it clicks into place. position. 7. Reinstall the headlight housing. 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- 5. Press the bulb holder into the socket and 08 stall the headlight housing. press until it clicks into place. 6. Press the cover until it clicks into position.

317 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

Front fog lights 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and Brake lights remove it. Rear fog lights (driver's side only) 4. Install a new bulb by turning clockwise. Backup light 5. Press the bulb into the holder. (The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb.) 6. Reinstall the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward. 7. Put the cover back into place.

G021753 Taillight housing G021754

The bulbs in the taillight cluster are replaced from inside the trunk (not the LED functions).

NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 314. G021755

Taillight lens, right side 1. Remove the covers in the left/right panel to access the bulbs. The bulbs are located in 1. Remove the cover by pressing in the clips Parking lights (LED) and pulling straight out. separate bulb holders. 08 Turn signals 2. Unscrew the fog light housing screw and 2. Press the catches together and pull out the pull it out. Side marker lights (LED) bulb holder.

318 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

3. Remove the defective bulb by pressing it in Trunk lighting Vanity mirror lighting slightly and turning it before pulling it out. Removing the mirror glass 4. Plug in the connector. 5. Press the bulb holder until it clicks into place and reinstall the cover.

License plate lighting G021758 G021759 NOTE 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower Before starting to replace a bulb, see edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry page 314. up the lug on the edge.

G021756 The trunk lighting is located on opposite sides 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge of the trunk. on the left and right sides (by the black 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. rubber sections), and pry carefully so that 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing the bulb housing comes loose. and pull it out. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire 2. Replace the bulb. mirror glass and cover. 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press 4. Replace the bulb. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and it back into the bulb housing. tighten the screws. Reinstalling the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir- 08 ror glass back into position.

319 08 Maintenance and specifications

Replacing bulbs

2. Press the three lower lugs back into posi- Lighting Wattage Bulb tion. function

Bulb specifications Front fog 35 H8 lights Lighting Wattage Bulb function License plate 5 C5W LL lighting Extra high 55 H7 LL beam (models Vanity mirror 1.2 SV5.5 with Active (length Bending 35mm) Lights*) Front parking 5 W5W LL Low beam 55 H11 LL lights (halogen) Front side 5 W5W LL High beam 65 H9 marker lights (halogen) Glove com- 5 SV8.5 Rear fog light 21 P21W LL partment (length lighting 43mm) Brake lights 21 P21W LL Trunk lighting 5 SV8.5 Backup lights 21 P21W LL (length 38mm) Rear turn sig- 21 PY21W nals LL NOTE Front turn sig- 21 H21W LL nals Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts 08 department for the most up-to-date specifications.

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades 2. Move the right steering wheel lever up and The windshield wiper blades are different hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer then move to the vertical position on the than the one on the passenger side. windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal posi- Service position tion by briefly switching on the ignition (or by starting the engine).

Replacing the windshield wiper blades With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. Check that the blade is securely in place. Wiper blades in service position The wiper blades must be in the vertical (serv- Cleaning ice) position for replacement, washing or to lift Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean them away from the windshield when e.g., helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv- removing ice or snow. To put them in this posi- ice life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper tion: blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm 1. Switch off the ignition (ignition mode 0, see soap solution or car washing detergent. page 80) and keep the remote key in the ignition slot1. 08

1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

321 08 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Filling washer fluid G021764

Location of the washer fluid reservoir The windshield and headlight washers share a common reservoir. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. Dur- ing cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 349.

322 08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Risk of explosion may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Wear protective goggles. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Recycle properly an extended period of time or if the vehicle Keep away from children. is usually only driven short distances. • Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

CAUTION Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks. The infotainment system's energy-saving NOTE feature may not function correctly or at all, A used battery should be disposed of in an and/or a message may be displayed if a environmentally responsible manner. Con- battery charger or jumper cables are not See the owner's manual. sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to connected properly. a recycling station. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger. Only Handling the ground point on the chassis may be Contains corrosive acid. • Check that the battery cables are correctly used. connected and tightened. See page 111 for an illustration and addi- • Never disconnect the battery when the tional information. engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by 08 factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold

323 08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

WARNING • Never disconnect the battery when the Changing engine is running, or when the key is in the • Never expose the battery to open flame ignition. This could damage the vehicle's or electric spark. electrical system. • Do not smoke near the battery. • The battery should be disconnected from • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the vehicle when a battery charger is used not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, directly on the battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- • To help keep the battery in good condition, tact occurs, flush the affected area the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 immediately with water. Obtain medical minutes a week or connected to a charger help immediately if eyes are affected. with an automatic charging function. • If the battery is fully discharged a number NOTE of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps The life of the battery is shortened if it prolong its service life. becomes discharged repeatedly. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and cli- Maintenance mate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary • If necessary, add distilled water. The level to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for should never be above the indicator. an extended period of time or if the vehicle • The fluid level should be checked if the is usually only driven short distances. battery has been recharged. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each CAUTION battery cell or the cover is securely in Always use distilled or deionized water place. • 08 (battery water). Check that the battery cables are correctly • Never fill above the level mark in the cell. connected and properly tightened. •

324 08 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side Detach the red positive cable until it reaches the rear edge of the box. Detach the ventilation hose from the 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery. battery 4. Connect the ventilation hose. Loosen the screw holding the battery > Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's clamp. body. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. 5. Connect the red positive cable.

WARNING WARNING 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). Connect and disconnect the positive and PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! negative cables in the correct sequence. Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). sories contain lead and lead compounds, 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with Removal chemicals known to the state of California the clips. (See Removal). Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key to cause cancer and reproductive harm. from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes Wash hands after handling. before disconnecting the battery so that all 08 Installation 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

325 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the trunk. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal Engine compartment wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. Under the glove compartment If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the Under the glove compartment same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical Trunk system inspected by a trained and qualified Not in use Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system. 08

326 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment

327 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker 60 Engine Control Module 10 Engine compartment, lower (ECM), transmission, SRS – Heated washer nozzles* 10 Positions – These fuses are all located in the engine com- - partment box. Fuses in are located under Headlight washers* 20 . Lighting panel 5 Windshield wipers 30 NOTE - – • Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be - changed at any time when necessary. Climate system blower 40 • Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ - circuit breakers and should only be – removed or replaced by a trained and Relay - engine compart- 5 qualified Volvo service technician. ABS pump 40 ment box

• There is a special fuse removal tool on ABS valves 20 Auxiliary lights* 20 the underside of the cover. – Horn 15 Pos Function A Active Bending Lights- 10 Engine Control Module 10 (ECM) Circuit breaker 50 headlight leveling* Central electrical module 20 Control module - automatic 15 Circuit breaker 50 transmission Circuit breaker 60 ABS 5 08 A/C compressor 15 Speed-dependent steering 5 Circuit breaker 60 Relay-coils 5 force*

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Starter motor relay 30

Ignition coils 20

Engine Control Module 10

Injection system, mass air 15 meter, engine control module

A/C compressor, engine 10 valves, engine control module

EVAP valve, heated oxygen 15 sensor

Fuel leakage detection 5

–

Cooling fan 80

Electro-hydraulic power 100 steering

329 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Under the glove compartment

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse Pos Function A Pos Function A boxes. 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. - Controls in front passeng- 20 er's door 2. The fuses are accessible. - Controls in right rear pas- 20 Positions-fuse box A - senger's door Pos Function A - Controls in left rear pas- 20 Circuit breaker for the info- 40 senger's door tainment system and for 12-volt socket (trunk) 15 Keyless drive* 20 fuses 16-20 08 Controls in driver's door 20 - Power driver's seat* 20

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A Power front passenger's 20 - Adaptive cruise control/ 10 seat* collision warning* Heated front passenger's 15 Folding rear seat head 15 seat* Courtesy lighting, rain sen- 7.5 restraints sor* Heated driver's seat* 15 Infotainment control mod- 5 Steering wheel module 7.5 ule Park assist*, trailer hitch 5 control module*, park Cental locking: fuel filler 10 Infotainment system, Sirius 10 assist camera* door satellite radio* All Wheel Drive* control 5 - Infotainment system 15 module Windshield washer 15 Bluetooth hands-free sys- 5 Active chassis system* 10 tem Trunk open 10 Positions-fuse box B Rear Seat Entertainment 7.5 - 10 system (RSE)* Pos Function A Fuel pump 20 Power moonroof* 5 - Courtesy lighting, climate Climate system control 5 system sensor - panel

12-volt sockets 15 Front courtesy lighting, 7.5 - driver's door power win- Heated rear seat* (pas- 15 dow controls, power Alarm, On-board diagnos- 5 senger's side) seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wire- tic system less Control System* 08 Heated rear seat* (driver's 15 - side) Instrument panel informa- 5 tion display

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Airbag system, occupant 10 weight sensor

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal, auto- 7.5 dim mirror function, heated rear seats*

Brake lights 5

Power moonroof* 20

Immobilizer 5

332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Cargo area

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A Pos Rear fuse box A - Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - side) NOTE - Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts Heated rear window 30 department for the most up-to-date speci- - fications. Trailer socket 2* 15 08 -

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 333 08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the Exterior components The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning when washing and cleaning the car: • Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel products, available at your Volvo retailer, for housings, fenders, etc). cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental The car should be washed at regular inter- • components such as chromed strips on the vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for adhere to the paint and may cause dam- quent washing is recommended. using these products should be followed care- age. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be in the wintertime. used. When washing the car, remember to remove Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. • dirt from the drain holes in the doors and CAUTION Doing so may cause detergents and wax sills. to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- scratching, use lukewarm water to soften ber components CAUTION the dirt before you wash with a soft • Polishing chromed strips can wear sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. • During high pressure washing, the away or damage the surface • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork spray mouthpiece must never be closer • Polishes containing abrasive sub- as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not stances should not be used may be permanently damaged. spray into the locks. • A detergent can be used to facilitate the • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can softening of dirt and oil. reduce lighting capacity considerably. Automatic car wash • We do NOT recommend washing your car • Dry the car with a clean chamois and Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling. in an automatic wash during the first few remember to clean the drain holes in the months (because the paint will not have doors and rocker panels. Special moonroof cautions: hardened sufficiently). • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover • Always close the moonroof and sun • An automatic wash is a simple and quick after the car has been washed. shade before washing your vehicle. way to clean your car, but it is worth • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on remembering that it may not be as thor- water can be used to clean the wiper the moonroof. ough as when you yourself go over the car 08 blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- • Never use wax on the rubber seals with sponge and water. Keeping the under- shield and wiper blades improves visibility around the moonroof. body clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do

334 08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

not have facilities for washing the under- Exterior lighting • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct body. Condensation may form temporarily on the sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). CAUTION headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand CAUTION • Before driving into an automatic car moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to Volvo does not recommend the use of long- avoid damaging the windshield wipers. pate after the lights have been on for a short life or durable paint protection coatings, time. some of which may claim to prevent pitting, • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any not been tested by Volvo for compatibility antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Polishing and waxing with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them Otherwise there is risk of the machine • Normally, polishing is not required during may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, dislodging them. the first year after delivery, however, wax- or cloud. Damage caused by application of • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- ing may be beneficial. paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty. plated wheels using the same deter- • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle gents used for the body of the vehicle. must be washed and dried. Tar spots can Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can be removed with kerosene or tar remover. permanently stain chrome-plated Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing Cleaning the interior wheels. compound. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly After polishing use liquid or paste wax. • and follow the instructions included with the WARNING • Several commercially available products car care product. contain both polish and wax. When the vehicle is driven immediately • Upholstery care after being washed, apply the brakes, • Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- including the parking brake, several ishing a dull surface. Fabric times in order to remove any moisture • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For from the brake linings. be purchased today. These waxes are easy more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, • Engine cleaning agents should not be to use and produce a long-lasting, high- shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric used when the engine is warm. This gloss finish that protects the bodywork stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. against oxidation, road dirt and fading. 08 constitutes a fire risk. AlcanteraTM suede-like material Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution.

335 08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

Leather care 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the CAUTION Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Under no circumstances should gaso- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a be used on the plastic or the leather protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- since these can cause damage. fading can result. pletely. • Take extra care when removing stains Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery such as ink or lipstick since the coloring leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on can spread. tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner • to the upholstery with light circular move- vent can damage the seat padding. removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. protectant restores a barrier against soil and • Start from the outside of the stain and sunlight. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. work toward the center. Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and • pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing should be applied after the cleaner and pro- protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. may damage the textile upholstery. tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other fin- • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as ishes in the vehicle. new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Cleaning the seat belts Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild ener 943 7429. soap solution. Cleaning leather upholstery Cleaning floor mats 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on 08 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements. textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec-

336 08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Paint repairs require special equipment and Minor scratches on the surface Consult your Volvo retailer. skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any exten- If the stone chip has not penetrated down to sive damage. the metal and an undamaged layer of paint Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as surfaces Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch-up paint. soon as the spot has been cleaned. Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially Color code Repairing stone chips designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo Make sure you have the right color. The color retailer. code number is stated on the model plate.

Touching up paintwork Minor stone chips and scratches Material: • Primer – can • Paint – touch-up pen • Brush • Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, G021832 you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any NOTE loose flakes of paint adhere to it. Paint code on the model plate1 When touching up the vehicle, it should be 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with Paint damage requires immediate attention to clean and dry. The surface temperature a small brush. avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish should be above 60 °F (15 °C). 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint Touch-up if necessary. thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats 08 and let dry after each application.

1 see page 342 for the location of the model plate.

337 08 Maintenance and specifications

Vehicle care

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish.

338 08 Maintenance and specifications

339 Label information...... 342 Specifications...... 344 Overview of information and warning symbols...... 351 Volvo programs...... 354

340 SPECIFICATIONS 09 Specifications

09 Label information

Location of labels

342 09 Specifications

Label information 09

List of labels Vehicle Identification Number Model (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The Identification Number (VIN) should always model plate is located on the rear side of be quoted in all correspondence concern- the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and ing your vehicle with the retailer and when rear passenger doors) and the rear pas- ordering parts. senger's door must be open in order to see Vehicle Emission Control Information. it. Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards cable emission standards, as evidenced by (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Min- the certification label on the underside of istry of Transport (CMVSS) standards the hood. For further information regarding (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet these regulations, please consult your all applicable safety standards, as evi- Volvo retailer. denced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. Cana- dian models have the upper decal; U.S. models have the lower one.

343 09 Specifications

09 Specifications

Dimensions–S80

Position Dimension in (mm) A Wheelbase 111.6 (2835)

B Length 191 (4851)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 75.9 (1927)

D Load length, floor 43.1 (1094)

E Height 58.8 (1493)

F Load height 14.5 (368)

344 09 Specifications

Specifications 09

Position Dimension in (mm)

G Track, front 62.5 (1588)A 62.1 (1578)B

H Track, rear 62.4 (1585)A 62 (1575)B

I Load width, floor 44.5 (1130)

J Width 73.3 (1861) 73.9 (1876)C

K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 82.9 (2106)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 75.1 (1907)

A With 16" wheels B With 17" wheels C Models with the optional keyless drive

Weights Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 4820 lbs 6-cyl. FWDA: 2190 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 5020 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWDB: 2280 kg

Capacity weight 6-cyl. FWD: 905 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 410 kg 6-cyl. Turbo AWD: 890 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 400 kg

345 09 Specifications

09 Specifications

Category USA Canada Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2690 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1220 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2750 lbs 6-cyl. AWD turbo: 1250 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 6-cyl. FWD: 2270 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1030 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2360 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 1070 kg

Curb weight 3680-3930 lbs 1670–1790 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg

Max. tongue weight 165 lbs 75 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive

Engine specifications Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4

Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93

Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70

346 09 Specifications

Specifications 09

Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200

No. of cylinders 6 6 6

Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2

Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1

A This engine may not be available on all markets

Engine oil This oil is only used at customer request, at Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC additional charge. Please consult your Volvo specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. retailer. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel Oil viscosity economy, engine performance, or engine pro- Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life tection. under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide Volvo recommends Castrol. good fuel economy and engine protection. See Depending on your driving habits, premium or the viscosity chart. synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo G023491 retailer for recommendations on premium or synthetic oils. Viscosity chart Oil additives must not be used. Extreme engine operation Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is and complying with oil quality requirements are changed at the normal maintenance services. recommended for driving in areas of sustained

347 09 Specifications

09 Specifications

temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow- The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro- three parts: longed driving in mountainous areas. • The upper section describes the oil's per- American Petroleum Institute (API) formance level. symbol • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. • The lower section indicates whether the oil has demonstrated energy-conserving properties in a standard test in comparison to a reference oil. G022917

Oil volume Engine model Volume (incl. filter) 3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

348 09 Specifications

Specifications 09

Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume Specification

Transmission oilA Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1

Coolant 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) packaging.

Air conditioning All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil

Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+

Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB) water.

Fuel tank volume 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters)

A Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. B Models without headlight washers

349 09 Specifications

09 Specifications

Electrical system General information 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- nator. Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis.

Performance, battery Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).

350 09 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols 09

Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols The symbols in the vehicle's various displays Warning symbols Symbol Description P. are divided into three main categories: Symbol Description P. no. • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols no. Fault in the Active 75 Bending Light Information symbols • Low oil pressure 76 (ABL)*system The following tables list the most common symbols, their meaning and the pages in this Parking brake 76 Malfunction indicator 75 manual that provide more detailed information. light

A Warning symbol A The red warning symbol lights up to SRS airbags 76 Anti-lock brake sys- 75 indicate a problem related to safety and/or tem (ABS) drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. Seat belt reminder 77 A

Information symbol Rear fog light on 75 Generator not charg- 77 The information symbol lights up and a ing text message is displayed to provide the driver Stability system 75 with necessary information about one of the Fault in the brake sys- 77 (DSTC), Trailer Stabil- vehicle's systems. tem ity Assist* A Tire pressure monitor- 75 ing sensor (TPMS) Warning symbol 77 Low fuel level 75 A Canadian models Information symbol, 75 see text in information display

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351 09 Specifications

09 Overview of information and warning symbols

Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P. Symbol Description P. no. no. no. High beam indicator 74 Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Driver Alert System* 175 trol * 157 Left turn signal indica- 74 tor Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Active Bending Lights 91 Right turn signal indi- 74 trol *, Distance Alert* 157, (ABL)* cator 159

A Canadian models Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Fuel filler door (arrow 74 trol *, Distance Alert* 157, indicates it is on right Other information symbols 159 side of vehicle) Symbol Description P. Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Rain sensor* 96 no. trol* 157 Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Driver Alert System* 176 trol * 157 Radar sensor* 154 Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, trol * 157 Driver Alert System*, 178 Lane Departure Warn- Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Camera* 171 ing* trol *, Distance Alert* 157, 159 Laser sensor* Driver Alert System*, 178 Lane Departure Warn- Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, Collision Warning with 173 ing* trol *, Distance Alert* 157, Full Auto-brake and 159 Pedestrian Detection* Adaptive Cruise Con- 151, trol * 157

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Specifications

Overview of information and warning symbols 09

Information symbols in the center console display Symbol Description P. no. Audio files 219

CD folder 219

Video files 219

Bluetooth-connected 230 cell phone

BluetoothTM hands- 230 free

HD radio 212

Park Assist* 181

Information symbols in the ceiling console Symbol Description P. no. Seat belt reminder 19

Occupant Weight 26 Sensor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353 09 Specifications

09 Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These pro- fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

354 09 Specifications

355 10 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Anti-lock brake system oil...... 349 warning light...... 74 shiftlock override...... 114 10 12-volt sockets...... 195 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 117 Axle weight...... 287 Approach lighting...... 54, 95 A Audio system AUX/USB sockets...... 223 B Bluetooth devices...... 226 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 117 Battery Bluetooth hands-free system...... 229 Accessory installation warning...... 13 changing...... 324, 325 Bluetooth streaming audio...... 226 maintenance...... 324 Active chassis system...... 146 general functions...... 207 remote key, replacing...... 57 Active yaw control...... 144 getting started...... 202 specifications...... 350 HD digital radio...... 212 Adaptive brake lights...... 116 warning symbols...... 323 introduction...... 200 Adaptive cruise control...... 149, 151 media player...... 219 Black box...... 11 Airbags menus...... 252 Blind Spot Information System disconnecting the front passenger’s overview...... 200 (BLIS)...... 189, 190, 191 side...... 26, 27 radio functions...... 210 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 229 front...... 22 Rear seat entertainment...... 241 Booster cushions...... 45 inflatable curtain...... 32 Sirius satellite radio...... 214 side impact...... 30 sound settings...... 208 Brake lights...... 116 Air conditioning...... 138 steering wheel keypad...... 205 Brake system Air distribution...... 134 voice control...... 237 ABS...... 117 Brake pad inspection...... 116 Air distribution table...... 140 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 102 checking fluid level...... 312 Automatic locking retractor...... 37 Air vents...... 135 emergency brake assistance...... 117 All Wheel Drive...... 115 Automatic transmission fluid...... 349 Geartronic...... 113, 114 Anti-freeze...... 260, 312 general description...... 113, 114

356 10 Index

general information...... 116 infant seats...... 41 Cooling system, general information...... 259 warning light...... 76 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 46 Courtesy lighting...... 94 10 top tether anchors...... 47 Bulbs Crash mode...... 35 headlights...... 314, 315, 316 Child safety...... 36 Cruise control...... 147, 148 introduction...... 314 booster cushions...... 45 adaptive...... 149 license plate lights...... 319 child restraint systems...... 39 side marker lights...... 317 convertible seats...... 43 Curb weight...... 287 specifications...... 320 infant seats...... 41 Current, conserving...... 259 trunk lighting...... 319 Child safety locks...... 48 City Safety™...... 162 D C Climate system...... 139 air distribution...... 134, 140 Defroster...... 139 air vents...... 135 Camera, Park Assist...... 185 Detachable key blade...... 57, 59 Interior Air Quality System...... 134 Capacity weight...... 287 introduction...... 133 Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Catalytic converter...... 265 passenger compartment filter...... 134 bag...... 26, 27 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 229 refrigerant...... 133 Dome lighting...... 94 Cell phone voice control...... 237 Clock, setting...... 78 Door mirrors...... 101 Central locking system, introduction...... 52 Cold weather driving...... 260 Driver alert...... 175 Chains...... 290 Collision warning system...... 167, 168 Driver distraction warning...... 13 Check engine light...... 74 Compass in rearview mirror...... 103 Driving economically...... 258 Child restraints Conserving electrical current...... 259 Driving in cold weather...... 260 recalls and registration...... 38 Controls, center console...... 252 Driving through water...... 259 Child restraint systems...... 39 Convertible seats...... 43 booster cushions...... 45 Coolant...... 312, 349 convertible seats...... 43

357 10 Index

E Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 267 Fuses...... 326, 327, 330, 333 10 ECC...... 136, 138, 139 Economical driving...... 258 F G Electric parking brake...... 119 Federal Clean Air Act...... 306 Garage door opener Electronic Climate Control...... 136, 138, 139 ® Floor mats HomeLink Wireless Control System. 106 air distribution table...... 140 cleaning...... 336 Gasoline requirements...... 263 Interior Air Quality System...... 139 placing correctly...... 109 ventilated seats...... 136 Gas tank volume...... 349 Fluid specifications...... 349 Emergency locking retractor...... 37 Gauges...... 73 Fog lights Emergency starting...... 111 Geartronic...... 114 front/rear...... 92 Emergency towing...... 273, 274 Geartronic automatic transmission.. 113, 114 Four C (active chassis system)...... 146 Emission inspection readiness...... 307 Generator warning light...... 76 Front airbags...... 22 Glossary of tire terminology...... 286 Engine disconnecting passenger’s side air- overheating...... 77 bag...... 26, 27 Grocery bag holder...... 268 specifications...... 346 Front fog lights...... 92 Gross vehicle weight...... 287 starting...... 109 switching off...... 111 Front park assist...... 181, 183 Engine compartment overview...... 309 Front seats...... 82, 84 H heated...... 136 Engine oil checking...... 310 Fuel filler cap...... 265 Hazard warning flashers...... 93 low pressure warning light...... 75, 76 Fuel filler door, opening...... 264 HD digital radio...... 212 specifications...... 347 Fuel level warning light...... 75 Headlights volumes...... 348 Fuel requirements...... 262, 263 Active Bending Lights...... 91 Environment...... 12 changing bulbs...... 315, 316 Fuel tank volume...... 349

358 10 Index

high/low beams...... 90 Inflatable Curtain...... 32 Interior Air Quality System...... 134 high beam flash...... 90 Inflation pressure...... 281 Interior lighting...... 94 10 Headlight washers...... 97 Inflation pressure table...... 283 iPod connector (audio system)...... 223 Headphones...... 242 Information and warning symbols, table ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 46 Head restraints, rear seat...... 85 of...... 351 Heated front seats...... 136 Information lights...... 73, 74, 75, 76 Heated oxygen sensors...... 266 Information symbol...... 75 J

Heated rear seats...... 137 Infotainment system...... 200 Jack High beams...... 90 AUX/USB sockets...... 223 attaching...... 298 indicator light...... 75 Bluetooth devices...... 226 location of...... 298 Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 229 Hoisting the vehicle...... 307 Jump starting...... 111 general functions...... 207 ® HomeLink Wireless Control System...... 106 getting started...... 202 Home safe lighting...... 94, 95 media player...... 219 K Hood, opening/closing...... 309 menus...... 252 radio functions...... 210 Horn...... 89 Key blade...... 52, 57, 59, 60 rear seat entertainment...... 241 private locking...... 59 rear seat entertainment system, remote valet locking...... 59 control...... 250 I sound settings...... 208 Keyless drive voice control...... 237 general description...... 60 Ignition modes...... 80 starting the vehicle...... 109 Inspection readiness...... 307 Immobilizer...... 53 Instrument lighting...... 90 Important information...... 8 Instrument overview...... 72, 73 Indicator lights...... 73, 74, 75, 76 Instrument panel...... 125 Infant seats...... 41

359 10 Index

L Malfunction indicator light...... 74 Oil checking...... 310 10 Media player (infotainment system)...... 219 Labels specifications...... 347 Menu...... 127 list of...... 343 volumes...... 348 Messages in the instrument panel...... 125 location of...... 342 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 354 Mirrors LATCH anchors...... 46 Overhead courtesy lighting...... 94 defroster...... 102 Leather care...... 336 power door...... 101 Overheating, engine...... 77 Lighting panel...... 90 rearview, auto-dim function...... 102 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 266 Load anchoring eyelets...... 267 retractable...... 101 Loading the vehicle...... 267, 287 vanity...... 195 roof loads...... 269 Moonroof...... 104 P Locking...... 63 Motor oil Paint, touching up...... 337 Locking the vehicle...... 54 checking...... 310 specifications...... 347 Park assist...... 181, 183 Locks, child safety...... 48 volumes...... 348 Park Assist Camera...... 185 Low beams...... 90 MY CAR...... 127 Parking brake Low fuel level warning light...... 75 electric, applying/releasing...... 119 Low oil pressure warning light...... 76 warning light...... 76 O Parking lights...... 92 changing bulbs...... 317 Occupant safety...... 16 M Personal Car Communicator, unique func- Occupant weight sensor...... 26, 27 tions...... 55 Main instrument panel...... 125 Octane recommendations...... 263 Polishing...... 335 Maintenance...... 306 Odometer, trip...... 78 hoisting the vehicle...... 307 performed by the owner...... 307

360 10 Index

Power front seat Rear fog light...... 92 Remote key...... 52 memory function...... 83 approach lighting...... 54 Rear park assist...... 181, 183 10 with keyless drive...... 84 immobilizer...... 53 Rear seat entertainment...... 241 Power mirrors...... 101 key blade...... 52, 57, 59 Rear seat entertainment (option) defroster...... 102 key memory...... 53 headphones...... 242 locking the vehicle...... 54 Power moonroof...... 104 menus...... 247 Personal Car Communicator...... 54, 55 Power steering remote control...... 250 replacing the battery...... 57 fluid...... 313 Rear seats unlocking the vehicle...... 54 speed-dependent...... 146 center head restraint...... 85 Remote key/PCC Power steering fluid...... 349 folding...... 85 common functions...... 54 heated...... 137 Power windows...... 99 Reporting safety defects...... 17 laminated glass...... 100 Rearview mirror Roadside Assistance...... 354 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 20 auto-dim function...... 102 compass...... 103 Roof loads...... 269 Private locking...... 59 Rear window defroster...... 102 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 111, 325, 350 Recalls, child restraints...... 38 S Refrigerant...... 349 R Refueling...... 262, 263 Safety, occupant...... 16 fuel filler cap...... 265 Safety defects, reporting...... 17 Radio fuel filler door...... 264 Seat belt Sirius satellite radio...... 214 fuel tank volume...... 349 reminder...... 19 Radio functions...... 210 Registering child restraints...... 38 Seat belts HD digital radio...... 212 Remote control...... 250 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency Rain sensor...... 96 private locking...... 59 locking retractor...... 37 READ button...... 125 replacing batteries...... 251 buckling...... 18

361 10 Index

maintenance...... 18 Starting the engine...... 109 Tire inflation pressure...... 283 pretensioners...... 18 with keyless drive...... 109 10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 301, 302 reminder...... 18 Starting the vehicle indicator light...... 75 reminder warning light...... 76 after a crash (crash mode)...... 35 Tires...... 278 securing child restraint sys- Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 53 age...... 278 tems...... 41, 43, 45 changing from summer to winter...... 279 unbuckling...... 18 Steering wheel glossary of terms...... 286 use during pregnancy...... 20 adjusting...... 88 improving economy...... 278 using...... 18 horn...... 89 keypad...... 88, 127, 205 inflation pressure...... 281 Seats, front...... 82, 83 Locking/unlocking...... 88 inflation pressure table...... 283 Sensus...... 124 load ratings...... 282 Stone chips, touching up...... 337 Shiftlock...... 11 rotation...... 279 Storage spaces...... 193 snow...... 290 Side door mirrors...... 101 Studded tires...... 290 spare...... 291 Side impact airbags...... 30 Sunroof (moonroof)...... 104 specifications...... 282 Side marker lights, changing bulbs...... 317 speed ratings...... 282 Sun shade...... 100 Sirius satellite radio...... 214 storing...... 279 Supplemental restraint system...... 21 studded...... 290 Snow chains...... 290 warning light...... 76 tire pressure monitoring system...... 301 Snow tires...... 290 Symbols, overview...... 351 tread wear indicator...... 280 Spare tire...... 291 uniform tire quality grading...... 289 Speed-dependent steering...... 146 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Spin control...... 144 T tems)...... 47 Touching up paint...... 337 SRS...... 21 Temporary spare tire...... 291 Towing a trailer...... 270, 271 Stability system...... 144, 145 Three-way catalytic converter...... 265 indicator light...... 75 trailer hitch...... 271 Tire designations...... 284 Towing the vehicle...... 273, 274

362 10 Index

Traction control...... 144 V Warning symbol...... 77 Trailer towing...... 270, 271 Warning system, collision...... 167, 168 10 Valet locking...... 59 trailer hitch...... 271 Warranties...... 306 Vanity mirror...... 195 Transmission Washer fluid...... 322, 349 general description...... 113, 114 changing bulbs...... 319 Washers oil...... 349 Vehicle Event Data...... 11 headlight...... 97 shiftlock override...... 114 Vehicle loading...... 267, 287 windshield...... 96 Tread wear indicator...... 280 roof loads...... 269 Water, driving through...... 259 Trip computer...... 142 Vehicle maintenance...... 306 Waxing...... 335 Trip odometers...... 78 performed by the owner...... 307 Weights...... 345 Trips, long distance...... 259 Vehicle weights...... 345 Wheels...... 278 Ventilated seats...... 136 Trunk changing...... 298 changing bulbs...... 319 Voice control storing...... 279 driving with it open...... 258 cell phones...... 237 Whiplash Protection System...... 33 Turn signals...... 93 Volvo and the environment...... 12 Windows changing bulbs...... 317 Volvo maintenance...... 306 power...... 99 indicator lights...... 75 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 354 Windshield Volvo programs...... 354 IR coating...... 97 U Volvo Sensus...... 124 rain sensor...... 96 washers...... 97 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 289 wipers/washers...... 96 Unlocking the vehicle...... 54, 63 W Windshield washer fluid...... 322, 349 Upholstery care...... 335 Windshield wipers...... 321 Warning flashers, hazard...... 93 Wiper blades Warning lights...... 73, 74, 75, 76 replacing windshield wipers...... 321

363 10 Index

364